Yamaha HTR-3064 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Receptores AV
Tipo
El manual del propietario
Owner’s Manual
AV Receiver English for Asia*, Africa, Oceania and
Latin America
*Except for China
En 2
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
Features and capabilities ...................................................3
About this manual............................................................. 4
Supplied accessories......................................................... 4
Part names and functions.................................................. 5
Front panel........................................................................5
Rear panel.........................................................................6
Front panel display ........................................................... 7
Remote control .................................................................8
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers ..........................................................9
Speaker channels and functions........................................ 9
Speaker layout ................................................................ 10
Connecting speakers.......................................................10
Connecting external devices............................................ 12
Cable plugs and jacks .....................................................12
Connecting a TV monitor...............................................13
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices............15
Connecting video cameras and portable audio players .. 19
Transmitting input A/V to external devices.................... 19
Connecting the FM/AM antennas ..................................20
Set up the speaker parameters automatically
(YPAO) .............................................................................. 21
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure ...............................................25
Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 25
Changing input settings with a single key
(SCENE function) ............................................................26
Registering input sources/sound field program .............. 26
Enjoying sound field programs....................................... 26
Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders...... 26
Sound field programs .....................................................28
FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 30
Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 30
Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) ... 31
Clearing preset stations .................................................. 33
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 35
Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock................. 35
Controlling an iPod/iPhone ............................................ 35
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components....... 37
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver ................................................................. 37
Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 37
Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 38
SETUP
Configuring the settings specific for each input source
(Option menu) .................................................................. 39
Option menu display and setup ...................................... 39
Option menu items ......................................................... 39
Setting various functions (Setup menu)......................... 42
Setup menu display and settings .................................... 42
Setup menu items ........................................................... 42
Manages settings for speakers........................................ 43
Setting the audio output function of this unit................. 46
Setting HDMI functions ................................................. 47
Making the receiver easier to use ................................... 49
Setting sound field program parameters......................... 50
Prohibiting setting changes ............................................ 50
Setting sound field program parameters ....................... 51
Setting sound field parameters ....................................... 51
Controlling other components with the
remote control .................................................................. 53
Keys connecting external components ........................... 53
Default remote control code settings.............................. 53
Registering remote control codes for external component
operations ....................................................................... 54
Resetting all remote control codes ................................. 55
Extended functionality that can be configured
as needed (Advanced Setup menu) ................................ 56
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu............... 56
Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using
multiple Yamaha receivers ............................................. 57
Changing FM/AM frequency steps (Asia and General
models only)................................................................... 57
Initializing various settings for this unit ........................ 57
Using the HDMI Control function ................................. 58
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting ............................................................... 61
General........................................................................... 61
HDMI™ ......................................................................... 64
Tuner (FM/AM) ............................................................. 64
Remote control............................................................... 65
iPod™/iPhone™ ............................................................ 66
Bluetooth™.................................................................... 66
Glossary............................................................................ 67
Audio information.......................................................... 67
Sound field program information................................... 68
Video information .......................................................... 68
Information on HDMI™................................................. 69
About trademarks ........................................................... 69
Specifications.................................................................... 70
Index ................................................................................. 71
En 3
INTRODUCTION
Built-in high-quality, high-power 5-channel amplifier
1-button input/sound field program switching (SCENE function) .......................26
Speaker connections for 2- to 5.1-channel configurations
Speaker channels and functions .................................................................................................................9
Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................10
Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................10
Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................11
Acoustic parameter adjustment to match your speakers and listening
environment
Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters
(YPAO - Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) ........................................................................21
Specifying the settings for each speaker ..................................................................................................43
Volume control for each speaker..............................................................................................................44
Speaker distance settings .........................................................................................................................44
Sound quality control with the equalizer <Graphic Equalizer> ..............................................................45
Test tone speaker adjustment ...................................................................................................................45
Bass and treble level adjustment <Tone Control> ...................................................................................25
External device connection and playback
Cables and input/output jacks for this unit ..............................................................................................12
TV connection..........................................................................................................................................13
TV audio playback through this receiver.................................................................................................14
Connections for BD/DVD players (recorders) and other devices............................................................15
Audio signal output to the TV connected via the HDMI jack .................................................................48
Correction of lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync>...............................................................46
External audio and video recorder connections .......................................................................................19
HDMI/AV video input combining other audio input...............................................................................40
Front panel external device connections (for video cameras, portable music players, etc.)....................19
Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................4
Changing the input source names <Input Rename> ................................................................................49
Configuring the settings specific for each input source <Option menu> ................................................39
Playback from external devices ...............................................................................................................25
Playback from an iPod/iPhone (iPod/iPhone and components sold separately) .....................................35
Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................37
FM/AM Tuner
FM/AM broadcast listening .....................................................................................................................30
Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................31
Changing FM/AM frequency steps initializing various settings for this unit..........................................30
Multi-channel, multi-format playback
Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................26
Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................27
Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................27
Sound field effect configuration ..............................................................................................................51
Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................26
Front panel information display
Front panel display information switching ................................................................................................7
Front panel display brightness adjustment <Dimmer>............................................................................50
Digital video/audio signal information display <Signal Info> ................................................................40
Volume/sound quality adjustment functions
Easy listening at low volumes <Adaptive DRC> ....................................................................................46
Maximum volume settings.......................................................................................................................47
Startup volume settings............................................................................................................................47
Adjusting volume between input sources <Volume Trim> .....................................................................40
Remote control operation
Remote control names and functions.........................................................................................................8
Insert batteries into the remote control ......................................................................................................4
External device operation with this unit’s remote control .......................................................................53
Multiple Yamaha receiver operation without signal interference <Remote ID Switching>....................57
Other features
Standby mode after prolonged non-operation <Auto Power Down function>........................................50
Standby mode after a specific amount of time <Sleep timer>...................................................................8
To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <iPod Standby Charge> .........................36
Initializing various settings for this unit ..................................................................................................57
Prohibiting setting changes <Memory Guard>........................................................................................50
Features and capabilities
En 4
INTRODUCTION
Features and capabilities
About this manual
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
Remote control
Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2
YPAO microphone
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
VIDEO AUX input cover
This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and
product, the product has priority.
dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the
remote control. Refer to the “Remote control” (
p. 8) for the
information about each position of the parts.
J
1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the
corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page.
indicates the page describing the related information.
Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to display the
corresponding page in “Part names and functions.
Front panel
Rear panel
Front panel display
Remote control
Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (included)
To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input
cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks.
To remove the cover, push the left section of it.
Attach the cover
PUSH
Remove the cover
Installing batteries in the remote control
When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the
battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote
control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery
compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+
and -).
Replace the batteries with new ones if the following symptoms
become evident:
The remote control can only be operated within a narrow range.
bTRANSMIT does not light up, or only lights dimly.
NOTE
If there are remote control codes for external components
registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more
than two minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote
control, the remote control codes may be cleared. If this should
occur, replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote
control codes.
a
c
b
Battery compartment
cover
Battery compartment
En 5
INTRODUCTION
Front panel
a A (Power)
Switches this unit between on and standby modes.
b YPAO MIC jack
Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker
balance automatically (
p. 21).
c INFO
Changes the information shown on the front panel display (
p. 7).
d MEMORY
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (
p. 32). J1
e PRESET j / i
Selects an FM/AM preset station (
p. 33). J1
f FM
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM (
p. 30). J1
g AM
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM (
p. 30). J1
h TUNING jj / ii
Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (
p. 30). J1
i Front panel display
Displays information on this unit (
p. 7).
j PHONES jack
For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback
can also be heard through the headphones.
k INPUT l / h
Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or
right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order.
l SCENE
Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single
button (
p. 26). Press this key when this unit is in standby mode to
switch on the unit.
m TONE CONTROL
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones
(
p. 25).
n PROGRAM l / h
Switches between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are
using and the surround sound decoder (
p. 26). Press either the left
or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order.
o STRAIGHT
Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (
p. 27).
p VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting video cameras, game consoles, and portable music
players to this unit temporarily.
Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this
jack.
q VOLUME
Adjusts the volume level.
Part names and functions
VIDEO
AUX
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
VIDEO
AUDI O
PORTABLE
LR
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
YPAO MIC
m ok n
a
lj q
b
p
i
c fe gd h
J
1 : Usable when you have selected tuner input.
En 6
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Rear panel
a DOCK jack
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-12) (
p. 35) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10)
(
p. 37).
b HDMI OUT jack
For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video
signals to (
p. 13).
c HDMI1-4 jacks
For connecting external components equipped with HDMI-
compatible outputs to receive audio/video signals from (
p. 15).
d ANTENNA jacks
For connecting AM and FM antennas (
p. 20).
e COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting TV that are compatible with component video signals,
using three cables to output video signal (
p. 13).
f AV1-5 jacks
For connecting to external devices equipped with audio/video outputs
so that this unit can receive audio/video signals (
p. 16, p. 17).
g AV OUT jacks
For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV3-
5 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (
p. 19).
h AUDIO1-2 jacks
For connecting to external components equipped with analog audio
outputs to input sound into this unit (
p. 18).
i MONITOR OUT jack
For connecting a TV capable of receiving video input, and outputting
video signals to it (
p. 14).
j AUDIO OUT jacks
For outputting audio signals received when analog inputs such as the
AV5 or AUDIO1-2 jacks are selected (
p. 19).
k SUBWOOFER jack
For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (
p. 11).
l SPEAKER terminals
For connecting the front, center, and surround speakers (
p. 11).
m VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
Select the switch position according to your local voltage (Refer to
Quick Reference Guide).
n Power cord
For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet.
ANTENNA
FM
GND
AM
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV
5
AUD
IO 1
AUD
IO 2
COAXIAL
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
CENTER
SURROUND
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
OUT
MONITOR OUT
AV
OUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
SPEAKERS
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V-
120V
220V-
240V
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
OUT
SUBWOOFER
ANTENNA
FM
G
N
D
COMPONENT
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
AL
TV
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
A
UD
IO 1
A
UD
IO 2
CO
AXIA
L
(
C
D
)
CO
AXIA
L
O
PTI
C
A
L
V
IDE
O
SU
RR
OU
HDMI 1
(
B
D
/
DVD
)
HDMI 2
H
DMI
3
HDMI 4
D
OC
K
ARC
c
fg khi l
d
e j
b
nm
ARC
DOCK
a
Distinguishing the input and output jacks
The area around the audio/video output jacks is
marked in white to prevent connection errors.
Use these jacks to output audio/video signals
to a TV or other external component.
Output jacks
En 7
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Front panel display
a HDMI indicator
Lights up when HDMI signals are input at the selected HDMI input
source.
b CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP
technology is selected.
c Tuner indicator
Lights up when receiving an FM/AM broadcast.
d iPod CHARGE indicator
Lights up when an iPod/iPhone is connected through an optional
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12), and the iPod Standby
Charge function is active (
p. 36).
e SLEEP indicator
Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (
p. 8).
f MUTE indicator
Flashes when audio is muted.
g VOLUME indicator
Displays the current volume level.
h Cursor indicators
Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available
for operations.
i Multi information display
Displays a range of information on menu items and settings.
j Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
Front speaker L
Surround speaker L
Subwoofer
Front speaker R
Surround speaker R
Center speaker
Changing the front panel display
The front panel can display sound field programs and surround
decoder names as well as the active input source.
Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source
sound field program surround decoder in order. J1
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STRAIGHT
HDMI1
VOL.
Input source name
Sound field program (DSP program)
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
MUTE
iPod
CHARGE
abcedgf
hi jh
J
1 : While selecting a tuner input, the FM/AM frequency is displayed instead of the input source.
En 8
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Remote control
a Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
b TRANSMIT
Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.
c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power)
Switches an external component on and off.
d Input selector
Select an input source on this unit from which to playback.
e Tuner keys
Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner
input.
f INFO
Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name
of the currently selected input source, the sound field program, the
surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.)(
p. 7).
g Sound selection keys
Switch between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are
using and the surround decoder (
p. 26).
h SCENE
Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single
button (
p. 26). Press this key when this unit is in standby mode to
switch on the unit.
i SETUP
Displays a detailed Setup menu for this unit (
p. 42).
j Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN
k External component operation keys
Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external
components. J1
l Numeric keys
Enter numbers.
m TV control keys
Operate a monitor such as a TV.
n CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external component operations (
p. 53,
p. 57
).
o RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power)
Switches this unit between on and standby modes.
p SLEEP
Sets this unit to place itself in standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key
repeatedly to set the time for the sleep timer function. The front panel
display indicator lights up when the sleep timer is activated.
q OPTION
Displays the Option menu for each input source (
p. 39).
r VOLUME +/-
Adjusts the volume level (
p. 25).
s MUTE
Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (
p. 25).
RECEIVER
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TRANSMIT
SLEEP
1234
1234
125
V-AU X
TUNER
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
MOVIE MUSIC
STEREO
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
7 856
90
10
1234
REC
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
CODE SET
INPUT
MUTE
DOCK[ A ] [ B ]
POP-UP
MENU
a
c
b
p
o
d
e
g
h
i
q
r
s
l
m
n
j
f
k
HDMI1-4 HDMI1-4 jacks
AV1-5 AV1-5 jacks
AUDIO1-2 AUDIO1-2 jacks
V-AUX Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks
[A]/[B] Changes the external component you operating
with the kExternal component operation
keys without changing inputs. J1
DOCK A Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK
jack.
TUNER FM/AM tuner
FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.
AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM.
MEMORY Presets radio stations.
PRESET F / G Selects a preset station.
TUNING H / I Changes tuning frequencies.
Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when
settings menus, etc are displayed.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen when setting
menus are displayed, or ends the menu display.
Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.
Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off
JJ
1 : You can use separate kExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for
each input in advance if you wish to operate external components (
p. 53).
En 9
CONNECTIONS
This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and
connections in your listening environment.
Speaker channels and functions
Front left and right speakers
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds.
Front speaker layout:
Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position in the front of the room.
When using a projector screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen
from the bottom.
Center speaker
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.).
Center speaker layout:
Place it halfway between the left and right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or
just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned.
When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen.
Surround left and right speakers
The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1-channel speakers providing rear-
area sounds.
Surround speaker layout:
Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides facing the listening position. They
should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the speaker
tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in
Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a subwoofer that is equipped with an internal amplifier.
Subwoofer speaker layout:
Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce echoes from the
wall.
Connecting speakers
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
En 10
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Speaker layout
5.1-channel speaker layout (5 speakers + subwoofer)
Connecting speakers
Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel.
Connect at least two speakers (front left and right).
If you cannot connect all five speakers, give priority to the surround speakers.
The surround speakers should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position.
CRT monitors
We recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers to avoid video distortion, especially for
the front and center speakers near the screen.
If your screen still gets interference from magnetically shielded speakers, move the speakers farther
away from your TV.
60q
60q
80q
80q
Front speaker R
Front speaker L
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Surround
speaker R
Subwoofer
CAUTION
Remove the AC power cord of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers.
Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different
color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined)
cable into the “+” (positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “-”
(minus, black) terminal.
Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal
areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on.
ANTENNA
FM
GND
AM
AUDI O
2
CENTER
SURROUND
H
DMI 4
FRONT
O
R OUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDI O
OUT
SPEAKERS
Surround speaker
Front speaker
Subwoofer Center speaker
RL
RL
En 11
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Connecting front speakers
1
Remove approximately 10mm of insulation from the
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires
of the cables together firmly so that they will not
cause short circuits.
2
Loosen the speaker terminals.
3
Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap
on the side of the terminal.
4
Tighten the terminal.
Connecting center speakers / surround
speakers
1
Press the tab on the speaker terminal down.
2
Insert the speaker cable end into the terminal.
3
Lift the tab to fix the speaker cable in place.
Connecting the subwoofer
1
Connect the subwoofer input jack to the
SUBWOOFER jack on this unit with an audio pin
cable.
2
Set the subwoofer volume as follows.
Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than
half).
Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum.
Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe,
Asia and Korea models)
Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of
the terminal.
FRONT
KERS
2
2
3
1
4
4
FRONT
KERS
Banana plug
CENTER
SURROUND
SPEAKE
2
2
3
3
1
1
VOLUME
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN MAX
Subwoofer examples
En 12
CONNECTIONS
Cable plugs and jacks
The main unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for
components that you are going to connect.
Audio/Video jacks
HDMI jacks
Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack.
Only use an HDMI cable.
Analog video jacks
Audio jacks
Connecting external devices
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
The signal is separated into three components:
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B), and
chrominance red (P
R).
Use component video pin cables with three plugs.
VIDEO jack
This jack transmits conventional analog video
signals.
Use video pin cables.
HDMI cable
Component video pin cable
Video pin cable
OPTICAL jacks
These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals.
Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio
signals.
COAXIAL jacks
These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals.
Use pin cables for digital audio signals.
AUDIO jacks
These jacks transmit conventional analog audio
signals.
Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to
the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L
jack.
PORTABLE jack
This jack transmits conventional analog audio
signals.
Use a stereo mini-plug cable when connecting.
Digital audio fiber-optic cable
Digital audio pin cable
Stereo audio pin cable
Stereo mini-plug cable
En 13
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external devices
Connecting a TV monitor
This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV.
HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input
signal format supported by your TV.
Video signals input from a particular type of jack(s) are output from the same type of jack(s).
For example, these three output devices must be connected to the monitor by matching input/output
jacks and cables, and then you must change the TV’s input mode to the proper setting.
Connecting an HDMI video monitor
Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack.
Connecting a component video monitor
Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
OUT
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
V
IDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
V
IDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DV
D
)
HDMI 2
H
DMI 3
HDMI 4
DOCK
ARC
HDMI OUT jack
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
(MONITOR OUT)
VIDEO jack
(MONITOR OUT)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
Input Output
TV
HDMI input
Component
video input
Video input
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.
When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function, audio/video signals can be transmitted
mutually between the unit and TV with a single HDMI cable (
p. 60).
HDMI
OUT
C
OMPONEN
T
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIA
L
(
C
D
)
CO
AXIAL
O
PTI
C
A
L
V
IDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DV
D
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
M
O
NIT
O
R
OUT
AV
OU
T
AUDI
O
OUT
DOCK
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI input
TV
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIA
L
(
C
D
)
CO
AXIAL
O
PTI
C
AL
V
IDE
O
HDMI
1
(
BD/DV
D
)
HDMI 2
H
DMI
3
HDMI 4
HDM
I
OU
T
MO
NIT
O
R
OUT
AV
O
UT
A
UDI
O
OU
T
D
OCK
A
RC
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Component video input
TV
En 14
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external devices
Connecting a video monitor
Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.
Listening to TV audio
To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV:
When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI
Control function
When your TV supports both HDMI Control (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return
Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the
unit are possible using a single HDMI cable.
The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that
makes TV sound control easier to use.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return
Channel function” (
p. 60).
When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions
When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI
Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match
operations carried out on the TV.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically
when listening to TV audio” (
p. 59).
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIA
L
(
C
D
)
CO
AXIAL
O
PTI
C
AL
V
IDE
O
HDMI
1
(
BD/DV
D
)
HDMI 2
H
DMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDEO
M
O
NIT
O
R
OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
HDM
I
OU
T
AV
O
UT
A
UDI
O
OU
T
D
OCK
A
R
C
VIDEO
V
V
Video input
TV
When using other TVs
To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect its AV1-5 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio
output jacks.
Depending on the connection on TV, connect the TV’s audio output to the AV1-5 or AUDIO1-2.
Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound.
If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output
to the receiver’s AV4 jack.
Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation
using the SCENE function (
p. 26).
You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control
code (p. 53).
TV audio output Connection
Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a digital audio pin
cable.
Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a fiber-optic cable.
Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AV5, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, or V-AUX with a stereo pin
cable.
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
VIDE
O
HDMI 1
(
B
D
/
DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI
4
C
OMPONENT
VIDE
O
M
O
NIT
O
R
O
U
T
HDMI
OU
T
MO
NIT
O
R
O
U
T
AV
O
UT
AU
DI
O
O
U
T
D
OC
K
Y
P
B
P
R
AR
C
OPTICAL
O
O
Audio output
(Optical)
TV
Available input jacks
En 15
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external devices
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices
This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on
the external components.
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with
HDMI
Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-4 jacks.
Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) that the external device is connected to for
playback.
OPTION
HDMI
1234
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
S
ET
UP
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
d
dInput selector
jCursor C / D / E
jENTER
qOPTION
Input jack Video input Audio input
HDMI1 HDMI HDMI
HDMI2 HDMI HDMI
HDMI3 HDMI HDMI
HDMI4 HDMI HDMI
AV1 Component video Optical
AV2 Component video Coaxial digital
AV3 Video Coaxial digital
AV4 Video Optical
AV5 Video Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO1 Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO2 Analog (Stereo)
VIDEO AUX Video Analog (Stereo)
(
BD/DVD
)
COMPONENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
(
C
D
)
CO
AXIAL
O
PTI
C
AL
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDEO
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
P
R
P
B
Y
H
DMI
OU
T
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
O
UT
A
UDIO
OU
T
D
OCK
A
R
C
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI output
BD/DVD player
Receiving audio from other input sources
This unit can use the AV1-5 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from
other audio input sources.
For example, if an external device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack,
use the following method to change the audio input.
1
Use the dInput selector to select the desired HDMI input source.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1
3
Press jCursor C until “Audio In” is displayed, and then press
jENTER.
4
Press jCursor D / E to select the audio input source.
5
Once you have completed the setup, press qOPTION to close the
Option menu.
J
1 : See the section on “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” for details on
the Option menu (
p. 39).
OPTICAL
(
BD/DVD
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
(
TV
)
A
V
2
A
V
3
A
V
4
A
V
5
AUDIO 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIA
L
(
C
D
)
CO
AXIAL
O
PTI
C
A
L
VIDEO
HDMI 2 HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDE
O
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OUT
AV
OU
T
A
UDI
O
OU
T
DOCK
A
R
C
HDMI
OPTICAL
HDMI
HDMI
O
O
HDMI/Audio (Optical)
output
BD/DVD player
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;;;;AV1
HDMI1
VOL.
If you have selected AV1 input audio (optical digital)
Inputs that change the audio source
Assignable audio input jacks
En 16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external devices
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component
cables
Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks.
Using optical digital audio output sources
Select the AV1 input that the external device is connected to for playback.
Using coaxial digital audio output sources
Select the AV2 input that the external device is connected to for playback.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
AV 1
(
TV
)
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
CO
AXIA
L
O
PTI
C
A
L
VIDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
P
R
P
B
Y
HDM
I
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
OU
T
AUDI O
OUT
DOC
K
AR
C
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
O
OPTICAL
O
Component video / Audio (Optical)
output
BD/DVD player
AV 2
COAXIAL
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
(
CD
)
CO
AXIA
L
O
PTI
C
A
L
VIDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
P
R
P
B
Y
HDM
I
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
OU
T
AUDI O
OUT
DOC
K
A
RC
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COAXIAL
Y
P
R
C
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
C
Component video / Audio (Coaxial)
output
BD/DVD player
Component connections to analog audio output devices
You can use the video input from the AV1-2 jacks in combination with the audio input from other
AV inputs or AUDIO1-2.
When connecting these devices, select the AV3-5 or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input for AV1
or AV2. See “Receiving audio from other input sources” (
p. 15) for detailed setup guidance.
Select the AV input source (AV1-2) that is connected by component video cable to the external
device for playback.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
A
L
(
TV
)
A
V
1
A
V
2
A
V
3
A
V
4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
CO
AXIA
L
(
CD
)
CO
AXIAL
O
PTI
C
AL
V
IDE
O
HDMI 1
(
BD/DV
D
)
HDMI
2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDE
O
M
O
NIT
O
R
OUT
HDMI
OUT
MO
NIT
O
R
OUT
AV
O
U
T
A
UDI
O
OU
T
DOCK
Y
P
B
P
R
AR
C
AUDIO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Component video / Audio
output
Game console
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;AUDIO1
AV1
VOL .
En 17
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external devices
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables
Connect the external device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-5 input jacks.
Using optical digital audio output sources
Select the AV4 input that the external device is connected to for playback.
Using coaxial digital audio output sources
Select the AV3 input that the external device is connected to for playback.
Using analog stereo audio output sources
Select the AV5 input that the external device is connected to for playback.
TV
OPTICAL
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
CO
AXIA
L
VIDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
HDM
I
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
OU
T
AUDI O
OUT
DOC
K
Y
P
B
P
R
A
R
C
VIDEO
OPTICAL
V
V
O
O
Video / Audio (Optical)
output
BD/DVD player
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 4
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
O
PTI
C
A
L
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
HDM
I
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
OU
T
AUDI O
OUT
DOC
K
Y
P
B
P
R
ARC
VIDEO
COAXIAL
V
V
C
C
Video / Audio (Coaxial)
output
BD/DVD player
AV 5
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
CO
AXIA
L
O
PTI
C
A
L
VIDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
HDM
I
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
OU
T
AUDI O
OUT
DOC
K
Y
P
B
P
R
A
R
C
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
V
V
Video / Audio
output
BD/DVD player
En 18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external devices
Connecting CD players and other audio devices
Using analog stereo output sources
Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) that the external device is connected to for playback.
Using optical digital output sources
Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) that the external device is connected to for playback.
Using coaxial digital output sources
Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) that the external device is connected to for playback.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
CO
AXIA
L
O
PTI
C
A
L
VIDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
HDM
I
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
OU
T
AUDI O
OUT
DOC
K
Y
P
B
P
R
AR
C
AUDIO
R
L
R
L
Audio output
CD player
OPTICAL
TV
OPTICAL
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
CO
AXIA
L
VIDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
P
R
P
B
Y
HDM
I
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
OU
T
AUDI O
OUT
DOC
K
A
R
C
O
O
OPTICAL
CD player
Audio (Optical) output
We recommend connecting audio devices with an coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital
jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD”
SCENE key (
p. 26).
COAXIAL
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 4
AV 5
AUDIO 1
AUDI O 2
O
PTI
C
A
L
VIDE
O
HDMI
1
(
B
D/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
HDM
I
OUT
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
AV
OU
T
AUDI O
OUT
DOC
K
Y
P
B
P
R
AR
C
C
C
COAXIAL
Audio (Coaxial) output
CD player
En 19
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external devices
Connecting video cameras and portable audio players
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect video cameras, game consoles, or
portable audio devices to the receiver.
Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices.
Transmitting input A/V to external devices
This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external devices through the
AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to VCRs or
similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external devices.
Using the AV OUT jacks
Connect this jacks to the external device’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks.
Using the AUDIO OUT jacks
Connect this jack to the external device’s analog audio input jacks.
Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices.
When external components are connected to both the PORTABLE jack and the AUDIO jacks, the sound
output from the PORTABLE jack is transmitted.
L
R
V
AU D I O
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
AU X
STRAIGHT
RADIO
VIDEO
AUDIO
PORTABLE
LR
V
R
L
Audio output
Portable audio player Video cameras
Audio output
Video output
HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted
from these jacks.
AV
OUT
AUDI O
OUT
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
AL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
CO
AXIAL
O
PTI
C
AL
VIDE
O
HDMI 1
(
BD
/
DV
D
)
HDMI
2
HDMI
3
HDMI
4
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
O
UT
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
DOC
K
AR
C
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L
V
AUDIO
R
L
R
L
V
R
L
Audio recorder
Audio input
VCR
Video / Audio
input
En 20
CONNECTIONS
An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are included with this receiver. Connect these antennas
properly to their respective jacks.
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Improving FM reception
We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized
dealer.
Improving AM reception
Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5-10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop
antenna is still connected.
Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper
plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground.
The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet.
FM
GND
AM
C
ENTER
SU
RR
OU
N
D
H
DMI
3
HDMI 4
F
R
O
NT
MONITOR OUT
S
PEAKER
S
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Position the AM antenna away from the receiver. The
wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the
GND jack.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
ReleaseInsertPress and hold
En 21
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using
YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings for which specialist knowledge is usually needed, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room
in which this unit is placed). J1
1
Check the following before using YPAO.
This unit
The headphones are removed.
Subwoofer
The power is turned on.
The auto power-off function (if present) is set to off.
Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if
present) is set to maximum.
2
Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in
your listening position.
Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards.
3
Switch this unit on.
4
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack
on the front panel.
“MIC ON. YPAO START” appears on the front panel display, and
then changes to display the following. J2
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
When you use YPAO, a test tone will be output from the
speakers for approximately three minutes and acoustic
measuring will be performed. When using YPAO, be careful of
the following.
The test tone is output at high volume. Please refrain from using
this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others nearby.
Please take care that the test tone does not frighten any small
children.
VOLUME
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN MAX
Subwoofer examples
When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use
equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod)
as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod
screws to fix the microphone in place.
YPAO microphone
INFO
YPAO MIC
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Press[SETUP]
YPAO
Continues to the
next page
J
1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they
are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance.
J
2 : To cancel measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone.
En 22
CONNECTIONS
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
5
Press iSETUP to start measurement.
The following display appears if measurement finishes
without any problems.
6
Press jENTER to apply the results of
measurement.
7
Remove the YPAO microphone.
YPAO finishes automatically when the YPAO
microphone is removed.
SETUP
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
iSETUP
jCursor C / D / E
jENTER
This completes preparations. To achieve more
accurate results, be careful of the following when
measuring.
Measuring will take approximately three minutes.
Keep the room as quiet as possible during
measurement.
Wait in the corner of the listening room during
measurement or leave it entirely, to avoid becoming an
obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO
microphone.
NOTE
When a problem occurs, an error message or report
appears either during or after measurement. Use the
following page as a reference to solve the problem,
and carry out YPAO again.
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Progress00%
YPAO
Display during measurement
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
YPAOComplete
YPAO
You can use the following method to cancel
measurement results if you want to redo the
measuring. Press jCursor C to switch to the
following display, the use jCursor D / E to select
“Cancel” and press jENTER. After this operation,
use the same procedure to carry out YPAO again.
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you
have finished measuring, store the microphone out of
direct sunlight, and away from locations that may
experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV
equipment.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Disconnect MIC
YPAO
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Set>Cancel
YPAO
VOL.
En 23
CONNECTIONS
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
When an error message appears
during measurement
Check the content of the message from the list of
messages (
p. 24) to resolve the problem, and carry out
the measurement process again.
Check the error code that appears in the display, and
carry out YPAO again by performing the following steps.
When “E-1” or “E-2” is displayed:
1
Press jENTER once, and then press
jCursor E to select “Exit.
2
Press jENTER to finish YPAO, and set the
unit to standby mode.
3
Check that the speakers are properly
connected.
4
Turn on the unit, and then carry out YPAO
again.
When “E-5” to “E-9” is displayed:
1
Check that the environment is suitable for
accurate measurement.
2
Press jENTER to switch the display.
3
Check that “Retry” is selected, and then
press jENTER to carry out YPAO again.
When “E-10” is displayed:
1
Press jENTER once, and then press
jCursor E to select “Exit.
2
Press jENTER to finish YPAO.
3
Switch the unit to standby mode.
4
Turn on the unit again, and then carry out
YPAO.
When a warning message appears
after measurement
Check the content of the message from the list of
messages (
p. 24) to resolve the problem. You can
confirm the speaker that has the problem when that
speaker’s indicator lights up.
When multiple warning messages appear:
Use jCursor D / E to display other warning messages.
When applying the results of measurement:
Press jENTER to switch display, the use jCursor D
/ E to select “Set” and press jENTER.
When cancelling YPAO:
Press jENTER to switch display, the use jCursor D
/ E to select “Cancel” and press jENTER.
ENTER
8
5
9
0
10
1
4
R
E
C
TV
TV
V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
UP
RETURN
V
O
L
U
M
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R
.
DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
A
V
A
A
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
2
3
2
3
1
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
U
T
E
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
DOC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
jCursor D / E
jENTER
E-9:CANCEL
YPAO
VOL.
Error message (example)
NOTE
Although you can apply the results of measurement
when a warning message appears, doing so will not
provide optimal sound. We recommend you resolve
the problem and then carry out YPAO again.
SL SR
W-3:LEVEL
YPAO
VOL.
Warning message (example) Speaker that has a
problem.
En 24
CONNECTIONS
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
Message list
When a warning message appears before
measurement
Error message
Warning message
NOTE
If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have
occurred and carry out the measurement process again.
Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is
not connected.
Connect the YPAO
microphone to the YPAO
MIC jack on the front
panel.
Unplug PHONES! The headphones are
connected.
Remove the headphones.
Memory Guard! The settings of this unit
are protected.
Set “Memory Guard” in
the Setup menu to “Off.
E-1:FRONT SP The unit was not able to
find the front channel.
Check that the left and
right front speakers are
connected correctly.
E-2:SUR. SP The unit was only able to
find one of side of the
surround channels.
Check that the left and
right front surround
speakers are connected
correctly.
E-5:NOISY The noise is too loud,
preventing accurate
measurements from
being taken.
Measure again in quiet
surroundings. Turn off any
devices in the room that
may be emitting noise, or
place them further away
from the YPAO
microphone.
When this message is
displayed, selecting
“Proceed” will allow you
to continue measuring.
However, we recommend
resolving the problem and
measuring again, as
continuing measurement
without doing so will not
give accurate results.
E-7:NO MIC The YPAO microphone
has been removed.
While measuring, take
care not to touch the
YPAO microphone.
E-8:NO SIGNAL The YPAO microphone
could not distinguish a
test tone.
Check that the YPAO
microphone has been
installed correctly.
Check that each speaker
has been connected and
installed correctly.
The YPAO microphone
or the YPAO MIC jack
may be broken. Inquire at
the retailer where you
purchased this unit, or the
nearest Yamaha service
center.
E-9:CANCEL You have carried out an
operation that has
cancelled the measuring
process.
Carry out the measuring
process again. Do not
operate this unit by, for
example, adjusting the
volume.
E-10:INTERNAL An internal error has
occurred.
Turn off and on this unit,
and carry out the measuring
process again. Contact a
Yamaha service center if
“E-10” appears again.
W-1:PHASE The speakers displayed
are connected with the
opposite polarity.
Depending on the type of
speakers you are using
and the environment in
which you have them
installed, this message
may occur even if the
speakers are connected
correctly.
Depending on the type of
speakers, “W-1” may
display even if the
speakers are connected
correctly.
Check that the speaker
polarity + (plus), and -
(minus) are correct. If
these are connected
correctly, you can use the
speakers normally even
this message appears.
W-2:OVER 24m
(80ft)
The speakers displayed
are separated from the
listening position by
more than 24m, and
cannot be adjusted
correctly.
Install the speakers with
24m of the listening
point.
W-3:LEVEL The difference each
channel is too loud or too
low, and cannot be
adjusted correctly.
Check that all speakers
are installed in the same
surroundings.
Check that the speaker
polarity + (plus), and -
(minus) are correct.
We recommend the same
speakers or speakers with
as similar specifications
as possible.
Adjust the volume of the
subwoofer.
If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results,
but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you
resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process
again.
En 25
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on external components (TV, DVD
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
2
Turn on this unit and select the input source
using dInput selector.
The name of the selected input source is displayed for
a few seconds. J1
3
Play the external component that you have
selected as the source input, or select a
radio station on the tuner.
Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the
external component for details on playback.
For details on how to tune in to FM/AM stations, refer
to “FM/AM tuning” (
p. 30).
4
Press rVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume.
To mute the output.
Press sMUTE to mute the audio output.
Press sMUTE again to unmute.
Adjusting high/low-frequency sound
(Tone control)
You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range
(Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds
output from the front left and right speakers to obtain
desired tone.
1
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.
The current setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
2
Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output
level in those frequency ranges.
The display returns to the previous display soon after
you release the key.
Basic playback procedure
dInput selector
rVOLUME +/-
sMUTE
VOLUME
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
1234
1234
125
V-AUX
TUNER
MUTE
DOCK[ A ] [ B ]
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
UP
RETURN
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
E
NTER
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
s
r
d
The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be
set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the
headphones connected.
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM l / h
YPAO MIC
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Treble 0.0dB
TONE
VOL.
Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
2.0 dB
If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not
match those from other channels well.
J
1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front
panel display as necessary (
p. 49).
En 26
PLAYBACK
This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to turn the power on and change input sources and sound field programs with one key.
Four scenes are available for different uses, such as
playing movies or music. The following input sources
and sound field programs are provided as the initial
factory settings.
Registering input sources/sound
field program
1
Use dInput selector to select the input
source you want to register.
2
Use the gSound selection keys to select
the sound field program you want to
register.
Press one key repeatedly to select the sound field
program in the same category. For details on sound
field program, refer to “Selecting sound field programs
and sound decoders” on this page.
3
Press the hSCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front panel
display.
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel playback for almost any sound source using various
sound field programs stored on the chip, and a range of sound decoders.
Selecting sound field programs and
sound decoders
This unit offers sound field settings (sound field
programs) in many different categories suitable for
movies, music and other uses. Choose a sound field
program that sounds best with the source you are playing
back, rather than relying on the name or explanation of
the program.
Selects sound field program:
MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly.
MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly.
Selects stereo reproduction:
Press gSTEREO repeatedly.
Selects compressed music enhancer:
Press gSTEREO repeatedly.
Selects surround decoder:
Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly.
Switches Straight decoding mode (p. 27):
Press gSTRAIGHT.
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)
dInput selector
gSound selection keys
gMOVIE
gMUSIC
gSTEREO
gSUR. DECODE
gSTRAIGHT
hSCENE
SCENE
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
1234
1234
125
V-AUX
TUNER
MOVIE MUSIC
STEREO
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
DOCK[ A ] [ B ]
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
EC
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
CH
I
NPUT
M
U
TE
RECEIVER
O
PTI
ON
S
ET
UP
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
TRAN
S
MIT
S
LEE
P
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MU
T
E
ENTER
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
SOU
R
CE
CO
DE
S
ET
h
g
d
SCENE Input Sound field program
BD/DVD HDMI1 STRAIGHT
TV AV4 STRAIGHT
CD AV3 STRAIGHT
RADIO TUNER 5ch Enhancer
When changing “SCENE,” you can also use switch
between the external components that the remote
control operates
(p. 53).
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SET Complete
SCENE1
VOL .
Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed.
Enjoying sound field programs
Sound field programs are stored for each input source.
When you change the input source, the sound field
program previously selected for that input source is
applied again.
If the sampling frequency of an input source is higher
than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field
programs.
You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel
display to check what speakers are currently
outputting sound (
p. 7).
You can adjust sound field elements (sound field
parameters) for each of the programs.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
VOL.
Sound field program categories
Program
En 27
PLAYBACK
Enjoying sound field programs
Enjoying unprocessed playback
(Straight decoding mode)
Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback
sound without sound field processing. You can playback
as follows in straight decoding mode.
2-channel sources such as CD
Stereo sound plays through the front left and right
speakers.
Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/
DVD
Plays back audio from a playback source without
applying sound field effects, using an appropriate
decoder to split the signal into multiple channels.
1
Press gSTRAIGHT to activate the straight
decoding mode.
2
Press gSTRAIGHT again to exit straight
decoding mode.
Enjoying stereo playback
Select “2ch Stereo” from the surround field programs
when you want to playback 2-channel stereo sound
(from the front speakers only), regardless of the
playback source.
Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the
playback of CD and BD/DVD sources.
2-channel sources such as CD
Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers.
Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD
Playback channels other than the front channels in the
playback source are mixed with the front channels and
played back through the front speakers.
1
Press gSTEREO repeatedly to select “2ch
Stereo.
2
To deactivate stereo playback, press any of
the gSound selection keys to select a
sound field program other than “2ch
Stereo.
Enjoying sound field programs
without surround sound speakers
This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to
enjoy sound field surround effects, even without any
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You
can even enjoy surround sound presence with just a
minimal configuration of the front speakers only.
This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
automatically when surround speakers are
unavailable. J1
Enjoying sound field programs
with headphones
Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the
reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT
CINEMA mode). J2
g
Sound selection keys
gSTRAIGHT
gSTEREO
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
MOVIE MUSIC
STEREO
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
EC
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
CH
I
NPUT
M
U
TE
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
ON
S
ET
UP
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MIT
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
T
E
ENTER
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
SOU
R
CE
CO
DE
S
ET
D
OCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
g
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STRAIGHT
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
VOL.
Previously selected program
SW
L
R
2ch Stereo
STEREO
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Hall in Vienna
MUSIC
VOL.
J
1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available in the
following conditions:
When headphones are connected to this unit.
When a “2ch Stereo” sound field program is selected.
When straight decoding mode is selected.
J
2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the
following conditions:
When a “2ch Stereo” sound field program is selected.
When straight decoding mode is selected.
En 28
PLAYBACK
Enjoying sound field programs
Sound field programs
Category: MOVIE
Sound field programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games.
Category: MUSIC
This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs.
in the table indicates the sound field program for CINEMA DSP.
Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the
original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has
been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It
reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies
with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to
large, impressive sounds.
Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically
created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and
background music.
Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the
sound.
Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from
serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an
optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically
around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even
after long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in
an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion
and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound
depth.
Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety
programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and
sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands
in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.
Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration.
Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth
to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects
and dialog from a wide variety of scenes.
Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using
stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine,
beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual
seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is
traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from
all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a
palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber
music.
Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,
live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460
seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once.
The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant
sound.
Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz
music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field
that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments,
and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
En 29
PLAYBACK
Enjoying sound field programs
Category: STEREO
Suitable for listening to stereo sources.
Category: ENHNCR (Compressed music enhancer)
Suitable for listening to compressed audio, such as MP3.
Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode)
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sound
sources in up to 5-channels using a surround decoder.
2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. When multi-channel
signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right
speakers.
5ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel
sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all
speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at
parties, etc.
Straight Enhancer Use this program to restore the original depth and dynamics of 2-channel or multi-channel
to compression audio.
5ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 5-channel stereo.
q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of sound
sources.
q PLII Movie Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for movies.
q PLII Music Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for music.
q PLII Game Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for games.
Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music.
En 30
PLAYBACK
The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following
two modes for tuning.
Normal tuning
You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching
or specifying its frequency.
Preset tuning (p. 31)
You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by
registering them to specific numbers, and later just select
those numbers to tune in.
Selecting a frequency for reception
(Normal tuning)
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
2
Press eFM or eAM to select a band to
receive.
FM/AM tuning
dTUNER
eFM
eAM
TUNER
FM AM
8
5
9
0
10
1
4
R
E
C
TV
TV
V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
UP
RETURN
V
O
L
U
M
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R
.
DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
A
V
A
A
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
2
3
2
3
1
V
-A
V
V
UX
M
EM
O
R
Y
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
U
T
E
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
DOC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
d
e
When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of
the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the
best reception.
(Asia and General models only)
The factory pre-set FM/AM tuner frequency steps are
9 kHz for AM and 50 kHz for FM.
Carry out the following settings and select the
frequency steps suitable for your listening
environment.
1
Set this unit to the standby mode.
2
Press A while pressing and holding
STRAIGHT on the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is
displayed on the front panel display.
After approximately 3 seconds, the top menu items
are displayed. J1
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
A
PROGRAM l / h
REMOTEID-ID1
3
Press PROGRAM h twice to display
“TU.
4
Press STRAIGHT a few times to select
frequency steps.
5
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and
then switch it on again.
The power turns on, with the settings you made
configured.
TU-AM9/FM50
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
Continues to the
next page
J
1 : For detailed information on the advanced setup menu see
“Extended functionality that can be configured as needed
(Advanced Setup menu)” (
p. 56).
En 31
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
3
Use eTUNING H / I to set a frequency to
receive.
e
TUNING H
Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
on a higher frequency than the current one. J1
e
TUNING I
Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
on a lower frequency than the current one. J1
Registering and recalling a
frequency (Preset tuning)
You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations as preset
stations. There are two methods of presetting stations,
Auto Preset” and “Manual Preset.” Use one of these
methods to register stations.
Presetting FM stations
automatically (Auto Preset)
The tuner detects FM stations with strong signals and
registers up to 40 automatically.
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J3
3
Use jCursor B / C to select “Auto Preset.
d
TUNER
eTUNING H / I
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
lNumeric keys
qOPTION
OPTION
TUNER
TUNING
ENTER
7856
90
1234
ENT
10
R
E
C
TV
TV
V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
S
ET
UP
RETURN
V
O
L
U
M
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R
.
DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
A
V
A
A
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
2
3
2
3
1
V
-A
V
V
UX
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
U
T
E
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
DOC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
l
j
e
d
Entering a frequency number
In normal tuning mode, use the lNumeric keys on
the remote control to enter a frequency. Leave the
decimal point out when entering a number. J2
For example, enter as follows to select a station on
98.50MHz.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM98.50MHz
VOL.
Lights up when receiving
a broadcast from a station
Lights up when receiving
a stereo broadcast
9 8
5
0
When signal reception is poor
When you are receiving an FM broadcast and cannot
obtain a stable stereo broadcast, you can force this
unit to receive in a monaural mode.
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner
input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J3
3
Use jCursor B / C to select “FM Mode.
4
Press jENTER and use the jCursor D /
E to select “Mono.
5
When setting is completed, press
qOPTION to close the Option menu.
To return this unit to its original settings, use the
same procedure to return the settings to “Stereo.
FMMode
OPTION
VOL .
FMMode:Mono
9850
VOL.
AM stations cannot be automatically registered. Use
manual station preset (
p. 32).
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Auto Preset
OPTION
VOL.
Continues to the
next page
J
1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has
started.
J
2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you
enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that
the frequency entered is correct.
J
3 : See the section on “Configuring the settings specific for each
input source (Option menu)” for details on the Option menu
(
p. 39).
En 32
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
4
Press jENTER, then press ePRESET F /
G or jCursor B / C to choose the preset
number from which to start the Auto Preset
function.
Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after
you select a preset number.
If you do not select a preset number, Auto Preset will
begin approximately 5 seconds after “READY” is
displayed.
The Option menu closes automatically when presetting
is complete. J1
Registering stations manually
(Manual Preset)
Select stations by hand and register them as presets
individually.
1
Tune in to the station you wish to register,
referring to “Selecting a frequency for
reception (Normal tuning)” (
p. 30).
2
Use one of the following methods to
register the station you are currently
receiving.
Registering to a preset number to which no
station is registered
Press eMEMORY for 2 seconds or longer.
The station will be registered automatically to the lowest
open preset number (or the next number after the one
registered most recently).
Designating a preset number for
registration
Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset” on
the front panel display. After a small wait, the preset
number that the station has been registered to will
appear.
Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset to register
the station to, and then press eMEMORY to register.
e
MEMORY
ePRESET F / G
jCursor B / C
jENTER
jRETURN
RETURN
MEMORY
PRESET
ENTER
8
5
9
0
10
1
4
R
E
C
TV
TV
V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
UP
V
O
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R
.
DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
A
V
A
A
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
2
3
2
3
1
AM
T
U
NIN
G
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
U
T
E
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
DISPLA
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
DOC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
e
To cancel registration, press jRETURN.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:FM87.50MHz
READY
VOL.
Selecting a preset number
Status Frequency
Preset number
SEARCH MEMORY
During Auto Preset
Search
Preset for stations
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Auto Preset
FINISH
VOL.
When Auto Preset is complete
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
MEMORY
VOL.
Registered frequencies
To cancel registration, press jRETURN or do not
operate the remote control for about 30 seconds.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:Empty
9850
VOL.
Preset number
The newly registered frequency
Empty, or the frequency registered
most previously.
Blinks
J
1 : The preset with the lowest preset number will be selected
automatically immediately after presetting.
En 33
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
Recalling a preset station
You can call preset stations registered by automatic
station preset or manual station preset. J1
To select a registered station, press ePRESET
F / G to select the preset number of the
station. J2
Clearing preset stations
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J3
3
Use jCursor B / C to display “Clear
Preset” and press jENTER.
4
Use jCursor B / C to select the preset
number you want to clear, and press
jENTER to clear it.
5
Press qOPTION to finish this operation.
d
TUNER
ePRESET F / G
jCursor B / C
jENTER
jRETURN
lNumeric keys
qOPTION
OPTION
RETURN
TUNER
PRESET
ENTER
7856
90
1234
ENT
10
R
E
C
TV
TV
V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
S
ET
UP
V
O
L
U
M
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R
.
DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
A
V
A
A
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
2
3
2
3
1
V
-A
V
V
UX
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
T
U
NIN
G
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
U
T
E
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
DISPLA
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
l
j
e
d
Press jRETURN to cancel the operation.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
CLEAR
VOL.
The number of the preset to be cleared
Blinks Registered frequencies
Repeat this operation to clear the registration of
multiple numbers.
J
1 : Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be
skipped. “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed
when there are no stations are registered.
J
2 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the
lNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you
wish listen to. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.
appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered
the correct number.
J
3 : See the section on “Configuring the settings specific for each
input source (Option menu)” for details on the Option menu
(
p. 39).
En 34
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
Combining the video signals and
radio audio signals
Select the video signal to be output from the video
output jack on this unit when TUNER is selected as the
input source. For example, when watching the sports
relay on the TV, only audio can be switched to the radio
audio.
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J1
3
Use jCursor B / C to display “Video Out”
and press jENTER.
4
Use jCursor D / E to select the video
source you want to watch, and press
jENTER.
Selectable video source:
5
Press qOPTION to finish this operation.
d
TUNER
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
qOPTION
OPTION
TUNER
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
S
ET
UP
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
d
Volume Trim
OPTION
VOL.
Video Out
OPTION
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Video;;;;HDMI1
TUNER
VOL.
HDMI1-4 Video signals input from one of the
HDMI1 to 4 are output from the HDMI
output jack on this unit.
AV1-2 Video signals input from either one of the
AV1 and AV2 are output from the
component output jack on this unit.
AV3-5,
V-AUX
Video signals input from one of the AV3
to AV5 and VIDEO AUX are output from
the composite output jack on this unit.
Off Video signals are not output when
TUNER is selected as the input source.
J
1 : See the section on “Configuring the settings specific for each
input source (Option menu)” for details on the Option menu
(
p. 39).
En 35
PLAYBACK
Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote
control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound field programs (
p. 29) to give
compressed audio formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound.
Connecting the Yamaha iPod
universal dock
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the
operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for
information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone.
Switch the power on and place your iPod/iPhone in the
dock. The unit is now ready for playback.
Controlling an iPod/iPhone
After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press
dDOCK to switch to DOCK input and you can operate
your iPod/iPhone.
You can use the remote control of this unit to carry out
basic operations (playback, stop, skip etc) on your iPod/
iPhone. You can check song information on the iPod/
iPhone screen.
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th generation), iPod (4th, and 5th generation, and Classic), iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th
generation) and iPod mini are supported (As of October 2010).
When connecting an iPhone, please use a YDS-12.
Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses on the YDS-12.
dDOCK
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
ks
ke
kp
kw
kf
k b
ka
ENTER
DOCK
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
ENT
TV
T
V V
O
L
T
V
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
UP
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
U
T
E
TOP
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
[
A
]
[
B
]
k
j
d
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, place this unit in standby mode
before connecting an iPod universal dock.
CO
MP
ON
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
CA
AV
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
M
ONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
OUT
AR
C
Yamaha iPod universal dock
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
iPodconnected
VOL.
dDOCK Switches to the DOCK (iPod) input.
jCursor B / C J1
Move the cursor up and down to different
fields.
jCursor D / E J1
Returns to the previous menu or enter the
menu you have selected.
jENTER J1 Enters the selected menu.
k w Searches backwards while held down.
k f Searches forwards while held down.
k b
Skips to the beginning of the currently
playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips
one song backwards with each press.
k a Skips to the beginning of the next song.
k s Stops playback.
k e Switches between playback and pause.
k p Switches between playback and pause.
J
1 : These keys may not work for some types of iPod. In this case,
carry out these operations directly with your iPod.
En 36
PLAYBACK
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
dDOCK
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
qOPTION
OPTION
ENTER
DOCK
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
S
ET
UP
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
d
To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit
is in standby mode
If you connect an iPod/iPhone to the iPod universal
dock the iPod/iPhone will always charge when this
unit is turned on.
This unit can charge an iPod/iPhone even when in
standby mode (iPod Standby Charge function).
Check the iPod CHARGE indicator ( )
on the front panel display of this unit to check
whether this unit is charging an iPod/iPhone while in
standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the
iPod charge indicator lights. The indicator goes out
when charging is finished.
If necessary, you can also deactivate the iPod Standby
Charge function.
1
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK
input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu.
3
Use jCursor B / C to display “Standby
Charge” and press jENTER.
4
Use jCursor D / E to switch the setting
to “Off.
5
When setting is completed, press
qOPTION to close the Option menu.
To re-activate the Standby Charge function carry out
this procedure again and change the “Standby
Charge” setting back to “On.
iPod
CHARGE
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Charge;;;;;;On
DOCK
VOL.
En 37
PLAYBACK
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible
portable music players. J1
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit.
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be
complete when this unit is turned on.
Pairing Bluetooth™ components
Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth
component for the first time, or when settings have been
deleted.
Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth
component as necessary when carrying out pairing.
1
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
2
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with and set it to pairing mode.
3
Press qOPTION to display the Option menu
and use jCursor B / C to select “Pairing.
4
Press jENTER to start pairing.
5
Make sure the Bluetooth component
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
When the device is recognized it will appear in the
Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10
YAMAHA.
6
Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
from the Bluetooth component list, and
enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth
component.
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
NOTE
When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection
you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component.
dDOCK
eMEMORY
jCursor B / C
jENTER
jRETURN
qOPTION
OPTION
RETURN
MEMORY
ENTER
DOCK
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
ENT
TV
T
V V
O
L
T
V
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
S
ET
UP
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
U
T
E
TOP
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
e
d
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, place this unit in standby mode
before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
CO
MP
ON
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
CA
AV
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
M
ONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
OUT
AR
C
Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be
paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When
the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the
device which has not been used for the longest period
of time will be deleted.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Pairing
OPTION
VOL .
To cancel pairing, press jRETURN.
You can also press and hold
eMEMORY on the front
panel to begin pairing.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Searching...
DOCK
VOL .
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Completed
DOCK
VOL .
When pairing occurs correctly
J
1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
of the Bluetooth profile.
En 38
PLAYBACK
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
Using Bluetooth™ components
When pairing is complete, carry out the following
procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this
unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless
connection is complete, you playback from Bluetooth
components.
1
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu.
3
Use jCursor B / C to select “Connect” and
press jENTER. J1
4
Operate the Bluetooth component for
playback.
d
DOCK
jCursor B / C
jENTER
qOPTION
OPTION
ENTER
DOCK
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
S
ET
UP
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
d
Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless
connection is established automatically or by
operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is
not necessary to carry out the following procedure.
“Not found” is displayed when there is an error
connecting. Check that the following conditions have
been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless
connection again.
Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired.
The Bluetooth component is switched on.
The Bluetooth component is within 32 feet (10 meters)
of the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same
steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
BTconnected
VOL.
When wireless connection is complete
J
1 : “Disconnect” is displayed while a Bluetooth component has been
connected.
En 39
SETUP
This receiver has a unique option menu specific for each type of input source, such as volume trim for compatible input sources, audio/video data display for signals from
external devices, and other frequently used menu items.
Option menu display and setup
1
Use the dInput selector on the remote
control to select the Option menu you wish
to display.
2
Press qOPTION.
The Option menu appears for the desired input source.
3
Select the desired control/setup item using
jCursor B / C and press jENTER.
The displayed Option menu items differ depending on
the input source.
For details, read the following Option menu items
section.
4
Select the desired menu item (or enable a
function) using jCursor B / C / D / E and
jENTER.
Parameters of the selected item are displayed. The
parameters you can set differ depending on the menu
items.
5
To close the Option menu, press qOPTION.
Option menu items
The following items are provided for each input source. “” indicates the available menu for each input source.
Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)
dInput selector
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
qOPTION
OPTION
RETURN
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
1234
1234
125
V-AUX
TUNER
ENTER
DOCK
8
5
9
0
10
1
4
R
E
C
TV
TV
V
OL
T
V CH
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
S
ET
UP
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
SU
R
.
DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
U
T
E
T
O
P
M
EN
U
PO
P-
UP
MENU
DISPLA
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
d
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VolumeTrim
OPTION
VOL .
Option menu
You can also use jRETURN to return to the previous
screen or close the Option menu.
Certain selected menu items may automatically close
the Option menu when their functions are enabled.
For a few seconds after closing the Option menu, the
remote control keys may not function. If this occurs,
reselect the input source.
Vol u me Tr im Audio In Signal Info FM Mode Auto Preset Clear Preset Video Out Standby Charge Connect/Disconnect Pairing
HDMI1-4 ✓✓
AV1-2 ✓✓
AV3-4 ✓✓
AV5
AUDIO1-2
V-AUX
TUNER ✓✓
iPod (DOCK)
Bluetooth (DOCK) ✓✓
En 40
SETUP
Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)
Adjusting volume between input sources
Input source: All
Reduces any change in volume when switching between input
sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You
can adjust this parameter for each input source.
Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source
video and audio
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-2
Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/
digital audio inputs in situations such as:
an external device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot
transmit audio through HDMI
an external device with component video output and analog audio
output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the
system
To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-4 or AV1-2)
as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this
menu.
Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input
jacks.
Displaying information on audio/video
signals
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1
Displays information on digital audio and video signals on the
front panel display. You can display the signal information by
pressing jENTER on the menu item and using jCursor B / C.
Audio information
Video information
Volume Trim
Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Default setting 0.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB steps
Audio In
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;;;;AV1
HDMI1
VOL.
Assignable audio input jacks
Inputs that change the audio source
Audio inputs Settings method
Optical digital audio
input
Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component
audio cable to the optical jack for the selected input.
Coaxial digital audio
input
Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component
audio cable to the coaxial jack for the selected input.
Analog audio input Select one of AV5, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2. Connect
the external component audio cable to the audio jack
for the selected input.
For details of settings, refer to “Receiving audio from other input
sources” (
p. 15) and “Component connections to analog audio
output devices” (
p. 16).
To return audio inputs to their previous settings, display this item
again, and select the original input jack.
Signal Info
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
DolbyD
FORMAT
VOL .
Menu item
Information
FORMAT Format of audio signals.
CHAN The number of input signal channels (front/surround/
LFE).
For example, if input signal channels are 3 front
channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/0.1” is
displayed.
If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above is
input, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may
be displayed.
SAMPL The sampling frequency of analog-to-digital
conversion.
B RATE The bit rate of input signal per second.
V IN Format and resolution of video input signal.
V OUT Format and resolution of video output signal.
V.MSG
(appears only
when an error
has occurred)
Error messages about HDMI signals and components.
Error message
HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed.
Device Over The number of connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
“No Signal” is displayed when no signals are being received, and
“---” is displayed if this unit cannot recognize the incoming
signal.
The bit rate may vary during playback.
J
1 : AV5 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel”
function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TVAudio).
En 41
SETUP
Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)
Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural)
Input source: TUNER
Sets this unit to automatically match FM broadcast frequencies in
stereo, or to convert the frequency to monaural (
p. 31).
Automatically presetting FM radio
stations
Input source: TUNER
Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency and
registers them as preset stations (
p. 31).
Clearing preset FM stations
Input source: TUNER
Clears the preset stations (p. 33).
Combining the video signals and radio
audio signals
Input source: TUNER
Select the type of video signals to be output from the video output
jack on this unit when TUNER is selected as the input source
(
p. 34).
Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby
mode
Input source: iPod (DOCK)
Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock while
the receiver is in standby mode (
p. 36).
Bluetooth™ wireless connections
Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK)
Enables/disables the Bluetooth wireless connection (p. 38).
Select “Connect” to establish the wireless connection. Select
“Disconnect” to disable the wireless connection.
Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio
receiver and your Bluetooth component
Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK)
Pairs your Bluetooth wireless device and this receiver (p. 37).
FM Mode
Auto Preset
Clear Preset
Video Out
Standby Charge
Connect
Disconnect
Pairing
En 42
SETUP
You can configure various function settings of this unit using the Setup menu.
Setup menu display and settings
1
Press iSETUP on the remote control.
2
Use the jCursor B / C to select the desired
menu and press jENTER.
Setup menu categories
Ex: Sound Setup menu
3
Use jCursor B / C to navigate the
submenus to find the desired setting and
press jENTER.
4
When multiple items appear, use jCursor
B / C to select the desired item.
5
Press jCursor D / E to change the setting.
You can change other items by repeating step 4 and 5.
6
Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu.
Setup menu items
Setup menu
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
SETUP
RETURN
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
EC
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
CH
I
NPUT
M
U
TE
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
ON
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MIT
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VI
E
MUS
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
T
E
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
SOU
R
CE
CO
DE
S
ET
D
OCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
Speaker Setup Manages settings for speakers.
Sound Setup Manages settings for audio output.
Func. Setup Manages settings to make receiver
operation easier, such as input source
labeling and auto-standby functions.
HDMI Setup Manages settings for HDMI, such as
HDMI Control functions.
DSP Parameter Sets parameters for sound field programs.
Memory Guard Protects settings against accidental
alteration.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SpeakerSetup
SETUP
VOL .
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Lipsync
SOUND
VOL.
You can also use jRETURN to return to the
previous screen.
For a few seconds after closing the Setup menu, the
remote control keys may not function. If this occurs,
reselect the input source.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;;;;Amp
HDMI
VOL.
Config
Level
Distance
Equalizer
Test Tone
Speaker Setup
Sound Setup
HDMI Setup
Func. Setup
DSP Parameter
Memory Guard
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Sur. LR
Crossover
SWFR Phase
Extra Bass
HDMI Auto
Auto
Manual
Lipsync
Adaptive DRC
D.Range
Max Volume
Init.Volume
Control
TVAudio
ARC
Audio
Input Rename
AutoPowerDown
Dimmer
(speakers)
(unit and speakers)
(speakers and frequency
bands)
En 43
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Manages settings for speakers
Speaker Setup submenu
Manual speaker setup
Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on
manually set parameters.
Subwoofer
Confirms the subwoofer.
Front
Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front
speakers. J2
Center
Selects the size of the center speakers.
Sur. LR
Selects the size of the surround speakers.
Config Manually manages speaker configuration, such as
speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass
audio processing.
Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on
distance to the listening point.
Equalizer Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output
characteristics.
Test Tone Generates test tones.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SpeakerSetup
SETUP
VOL .
Config
In the Config submenu, you can select the speaker size
characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound
reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers.
When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components
of the speakers that you configured are produced from the
subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer).
Yes (Default) Select this when you have a subwoofer connected.
During playback, the subwoofer will produce audio
from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass
audio from other channels. J1
None Select this when you do not have a subwoofer
connected. The front speakers will produce audio
from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass
frequency audio from other channels.
Woofer diameter
16 cm or larger Large
16 cm or smaller Small
Small (Default) Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will
produce front channel low-frequency
components. J3
Large Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will
produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
None Select this when there is no center speaker. The front
speakers will produce center channel audio.
Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected.
Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected.
None Select this when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel
audio signals.
Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small.
Large Select this when the surround speakers are large.
J
1 : Enabling the “Extra Bass” setting allows both the subwoofer and the front
speakers to produce bass audio.
J
2 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front
speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will
automatically change to “Large.
J
3 : Enabling the “Crossover” setting allows you to set the frequency components
of audio signals transmitted from the front speakers to the subwoofer.
En 44
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Crossover
Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component output from
speakers set to “Small.
Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the
subwoofer or the front speakers. J1
SWFR Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or
unclear.
Extra Bass
Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be
produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer
and the front speakers.
Controlling the volume of each speaker
Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. Use jCursor B /
C to select the desired speaker and adjust the volume with
jCursor D / E.
Manually setting speaker distance
Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that
sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same
time.
Selecting adjustment units
Use jCursor B / C to display “Unit,” and then use jCursor D
/ E to choose the units of length (meters or feet).
Setting distances for each speaker
Use jCursor B / C to display the speaker you want to configure,
and then use jCursor D / E to set the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
40Hz 110Hz
60Hz 120Hz
80Hz (Default) 160Hz
90Hz 200Hz
100Hz
NRM (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase.
REV Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Off (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the
front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front
channel low-frequency components.
On The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the
front channel low-frequency components.
When the “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” the “Extra Bass”
setting is disabled.
Level
FL Front speaker L
FR Front speaker R
C Center speaker
SL Surround speaker L
SR Surround speaker R
SWFR Subwoofer
Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Default setting 0 dB (FL / FR / SWFR)
-1.0 dB (C / SL / SR)
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
Distance
Unit Selects the distance unit (meters or feet).
Front L Front speaker L
Front R Front speaker R
Center Center speaker
Sur. L Surround speaker L
Sur. R Surround speaker R
SWFR Subwoofer
Adjustable range 0.30 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)
Default setting 3.00 m (10.0 ft) (Front L/Front R/SWFR)
2.60 m (8.5 ft) (Center)
2.40 m (8.0 ft) (Sur. L/Sur. R)
Adjustment
increments
0.10 m (0.5 ft)
J
1 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set
the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less).
En 45
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Adjusting sound quality with the equalizer
Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric or graphic
equalizer.
EQ Select
Select an equalizer type.
Generating test tones
Turns the test tone generator on or off.
Equalizer
PEQ Uses the parametric equalizer to adjust sound quality.
Selecting this setting applies the tone settings
obtained using YPAO (p. 21). J1
GEQ (Default) Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality. By
pressing jENTER, you can adjust the
characteristics of the graphic equalizer.
Off Does not activate the equalizer.
Adjusting the graphic equalizer
1
When “EQ Select” is displayed, use jCursor D / E
to select “GEQ” and press jENTER.
2
Check that “Channel” appears and use jCursor
D / E to select the speaker for which you want to
adjust the equalizer.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Channel;FRNT L
GEQ
VOL.
The speaker you are adjusting
3
Press jCursor C repeatedly to select the
frequency you want to adjust, then use jCursor D
/ E to adjust the volume.
Raising volume: Press jCursor E.
Lowering volume: Press
jCursor D.
4
When you have finished making adjustments,
press iSETUP to close the Setup menu.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
63Hz
GEQ
VOL.
Frequency band Setting the volume level for
the selected frequency
Frequency
range
63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/
16 kHz
Adjustable
range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Default setting 0 dB
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
You can use jCursor B / C to select another frequency or
return to step 2. Repeat steps 2-3 to adjust the tone to your
liking.
Test Tone
Off (Default) Does not generate test tones.
On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test
tones are produced constantly.
You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances. For
example, you can adjust the volume balance settings for each
speaker, or whenever you adjust the settings on the internal
graphic equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while
operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you have finished
making adjustments.
J
1 : Using YPAO to carry out acoustic measurement selects “PEQ” automatically.
“PEQ” does not appear if the measurement process has not been carried out at
least once.
En 46
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Setting the audio output function of this
unit
Sound Setup submenu
Synchronizing audio/video output
Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync
function).
HDMI Auto
When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts output
timing if the TV supports an automatic lipsync function.
Auto
Fine-adjust the audio output timing by entering the correction time
provided when “HDMI Auto” is set to “On.
Manual
Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when the TV does
not support the automatic lipsync function or “HDMI Auto” is set
to “Off.
Auto-adjusting the sound level to make
even low volumes more audible
Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level
(from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at
low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “On.J1
When the auto function is enabled, it adjusts the dynamic range as
follows.
Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Adaptive DRC Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low
volumes more audible.
D.Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for
digital audio playback.
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume for this receiver.
Init.Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned
on.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SoundSetup
SETUP
VOL .
Lipsync
Off Select this when the connected TV does not support
the automatic lipsync function or you do not wish to
use the automatic lipsync function. Set the correction
time in “Manual.
On (Default) Select this when the TV supports the automatic
lipsync function. Fine-adjust the correction time in
Auto.
Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms
Adjustment
increments
1 ms
Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms
Adjustment
increments
1 ms
Default setting 0 ms
Adaptive DRC
Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
On Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
On
Off
On
Off
Input Level Input Level
Volume: low Volume: high
Output Level
Output Level
J
1 : The Adaptive DRC setting is also effective when you use headphones.
En 47
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS
dynamic range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream
(Dolby Digital and DTS) playback.
Setting the maximum volume
Sets a maximum volume level so that the audio is not played too
loudly. The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest
volume.
Setting the startup volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When
this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the
receiver last entered standby mode. J1
Setting HDMI functions
HDMI Setup submenu
D.Range
Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume
or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream
signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals.
(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD
signals based on input signal information.
Std Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for
regular home use.
Max (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Max Volume
Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB / +16.5 dB (Maximum volume)
Default setting +16.5 dB
Adjustment
increments
5.0 dB
Init.Volume
Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Default setting Off
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off.
TVAudio J2 Chooses automatically selected audio input in
conjunction with TV operation when the HDMI
Control is turned on.
ARC J2 Transmits audio/video output to the TV and audio
input from the TV through a single HDMI cable.
Audio J2 Selects the audio output device connected to this
unit via HDMI jacks.
SWSW
C
L
SL SR
R
HDMISetup
SETUP
VOL.
J
1 : When you set the “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Init.Volume,” the “Max
Volume” setting has priority.
J
2 : When “Control” is set to On, “TVAudio” and “ARC” appear. When “Control”
is set to Off, “Audio” appears.
En 48
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control)
Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices
connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components
support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use
the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s
functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those
devices.
Please refer to “Switching the input source on this unit
automatically when listening to TV audio” (
p. 59) for
instructions.
Selecting an input source to assign audio
input for the TV
Select the input source that matches operations carried out on the
TV while the HDMI Control function is on.
When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to
the input source selected here. J1
Listening to TV audio via single HDMI
cable (Audio Return Channel)
You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function.
When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this
unit via an HDMI cable.
The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source
selected in “TVAudio.J1
By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s
audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the
unit.
When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return
Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display.
Changing the output destination of HDMI
input audio signals
Choose whether to playback audio from an external component
such as a BD/DVD player connected via HDMI through this unit or
through a TV.
Control
Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.
On Sets HDMI Control to “On.
If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the
HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate.
TVAudio
AV1 to AV5 Assigns any of the AV1-5 input source for the audio
input from the TV.
AUDIO1/AUDIO2 Assigns AUDIO1 or AUDIO2 input source for the
audio input from the TV.
Default setting AV 4
“TVAudio” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function
(Control) is set to “On.
Please refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (
p. 58) for
setting instructions.
For details on inputting the audio signal from the TV, refer to
“Listening to TV audio” (
p. 14).
ARC
Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.
On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.
ARC” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function
(Control) is set to “On.
Please refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio
Return Channel function” (
p. 60) for setting instructions.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
AV4
TV
VOL.
Audio
Amp (Default) Outputs audio through this unit only. When this
setting is selected, the external component outputs an
audio format compatible with this unit.
TV Outputs audio through a TV only. When this setting is
selected, the external component outputs an audio
format compatible with the TV. J2
Amp+TV Outputs audio from the TV and this unit. When this
setting is selected, the external component outputs an
audio format compatible with TV.
Audio” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function
(Control) is set to “Off.
J
1 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input
source cannot be used.
J
2 : When “TV” is selected, the speakers of this unit do not output sound.
En 49
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Making the receiver easier to use
Func. Setup submenu
Changing input source names
Changes the input source names to be shown on the front
panel display.
You can change an input source name by choosing from
a list of templates, or make one of your own.
SETUP
RETURN
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
EC
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
CH
I
NPUT
M
U
TE
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
ON
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MIT
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VI
E
MUS
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
T
E
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
SOU
R
CE
CO
DE
S
ET
D
OCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
Input Rename Changes the input source names.
AutoPowerDown Goes into standby mode.
Dimmer Sets the Brightness of the front panel
display.
Input Rename
Selecting a template
1
Select “Input Rename” from the Setup
menu and press jENTER.
2
Select the input source that you want to
rename using jCursor B / C.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Func.Setup
SETUP
VOL .
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
HDMI1
HDMI1
VOL .
Renaming the input source
3
Use jCursor D / E to select a new name
from the following templates.
4
Confirm the new display name by
pressing jRETURN. Press iSETUP to
exit the Setup menu.
To cancel a name change, select the original name
and then press
jRETURN to exit renaming.
Entering an original name
1
Select “Input Rename” from the Setup
menu and press jENTER.
2
Select the input source that you want to
rename using jCursor B / C.
Blu-ray Satellite
DVD VCR
SetTopBox Tape
Game MD
TV PC
DVR iPod
CD HD DVD
CD-R (blank)
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Blu-ray
HDMI1
VOL.
3
Press jENTER.
4
Use jCursor B / C to select the
characters you wish to change, and use
jCursor D / E to enter those characters.
The following characters are available for input
source.
A to Z, a to z
0 to 9
Symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.)
Space
5
Repeat step 4 until you have entered the
new input source name.
6
Confirm the new display name by
pressing jENTER. Press iSETUP to
exit the Setup menu.
To cancel a name change, press jRETURN.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
HDMI1
HDMI1
VOL .
Cursor
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
YAMAHABD
HDMI1
VOL.
En 50
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Goes enter standby mode automatically
when you leave it without operating
If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an
extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode
(Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is
“Off.” When you wish to activate this function, set the amount of
time to pass before this unit will enter standby.
Setting the brightness of the front panel
display
Sets the brightness of the front panel display. Lowering the setting
dims the display.
Setting sound field program parameters
You can set the parameters for the sound field programs (p. 51).
Prohibiting setting changes
Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made
to the settings on Setup menu.
AutoPowerDown
Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled.
4hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for four hours.
8hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for eight hours.
12hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for twelve hours.
This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the
standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the
countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the
timer.
Dimmer
Adjustable range -4 to 0
Default setting 0
Off (Default) Settings are not protected.
On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until
it is returned to “Off.
While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory
Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the
settings.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
DSPParameter
SETUP
VOL .
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Memory Guard
SETUP
VOL .
En 51
SETUP
Although the sound field programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange the effect by setting the sound field elements (parameters).
To adjust the sound effects suitable for acoustical conditions of audio/video sources or rooms, perform the following operations.
Setting sound field parameters
1
Press iSETUP to display the Setup menu.
2
Use jCursor B / C to select “DSP
Parameter” and press jENTER.
3
Use jCursor D / E to choose the sound
field program you want to edit.
4
Press jCursor B / C to select the
parameter that you want to change, and
press jCursor D / E to change the
parameter.
5
Once you have completed editing, press
iSETUP to close the Setup menu.
CINEMA DSP parameters
Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to
be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field
effect while checking the sound effect.
Setting sound field program parameters
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
SETUP
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
DSPParameter
SETUP
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
DSPPRM
VOL .
Sound field program to be edited
When there are multiple parameters in the sound field
program you are configuring, repeat step 4 as
necessary to change other parameters.
To initialize the sound field parameters
To set the parameters of the sound field program back
to default, press jCursor C repeatedly during
editing to select “Initialize” and press jCursor E.
When “Press Again >” is displayed, press jCursor
E again to initialize.
To cancel operations, press jCursor D when “Press
Again” appears and return to the original display.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
DSPLevel;;0dB
DSPPRM
VOL .
Sound field parameter Choices
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Initialize
DSPPRM
VOL .
DSP Level
Adjustable range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Default setting 0 dB
Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:
The effect sound is too soft.
There are no differences between effects of the sound
field programs.
Increase the effect level.
The sound is dull.
The sound field effect is added too much.
Reduce the effect level.
En 52
SETUP
Setting sound field program parameters
Parameters usable in certain sound field
programs
2ch Stereo only
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit
depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog
sound source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.
5ch Stereo only
Adjusts the center channel volume. J1
Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J1
Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J1
Straight Enhancer/5ch Enhancer only
Adjusts the effect level of the compressed music enhancer mode.
Parameters usable in surround decoder
q PLII Music only
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/
right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right
speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0
for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7
for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only.
Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and
the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level
created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred
sound balance.
The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more
negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
more positive.
When Neo:6 Music is selected
Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as
necessary.
Direct
Auto (Default) Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone
control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and
“Treble” are set to 0dB.
Off Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit.
CT Level
Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Default setting 100%
SL Level
Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Default setting 100%
SR Level
Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Default setting 100%
EFCT LVL
High (Default) Standard effect.
Low Sets when the high-frequency signals of the source are
emphasized excessively.
Panorama
Off (Default) Disables the effect.
On Enables the effect.
CT Width
Adjustable range 0 to 7
Default setting 3
Dimension
Adjustable range -3 to +3
Default setting 0
C.Image
Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0
Default setting 0.3
J
1 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.
En 53
SETUP
You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code).
The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source.
Selecting input source connected to DVD
player
Selecting input source connected to CD
player
Keys connecting external
components
cSOURCE A
Switches an external component on and off.
j
Cursor, jENTER, jRETURN
Operates the menus of external components.
k
DISPLAY
Switches an external component display.
k
External component operation keys
Functions as a recording or playback key of an external
component, or a menu display key.
lNumeric keys
Functions as numeric keys of an external component.
mTV control keys J1
Default remote control code
settings
The following remote control codes are assigned to input
sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, please refer to “Remote
Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM.
Controlling other components with the remote control
cSOURCE A
dInput selector
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
kExternal component
operation keys
kDISPLAY
lNumeric keys
mTV control keys
mINPUT
mMUTE
mTV VOL +/-
mTV CH +/-
mA
qOPTION
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
1234
1234
125
V-AUX
TUNER
ENTER
7856
90
10
1234
REC
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
INPUT
MUTE
DOCK[ A ] [ B ]
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
q
m
l
k
j
i
c
d
If you are unable to operate this unit after operating an
external component, press iSETUP or qOPTION
and then try operating the remote control again.
Playback/Stop
DVD player
CD player
Playback/Stop
DVD player
CD player
The remote control keys for controlling external
components are available only when the external
components have corresponding control keys.
mINPUT Switches video inputs of TV
mMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily.
mTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV
mTV CH +/- Switches TV channels.
mA Turns on and off TV
Input Category Manufacturer
Remote
control code
HDMI1 Blu-ray
player/
recorder
Yamaha 2064
HDMI2 ——
HDMI3 ——
HDMI4 ——
AV1 ——
AV2 ——
AV3 CD player Yamaha 5095
AV4 ——
AV5 ——
AUDIO1 ——
AUDIO2 ——
V-AUX ——
A/B J2 ——
DOCK DOCK Yamaha 5089
TUNER Tuner Yamaha 5085
J
1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to
dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in mA
(
mTV control keys).
To register a TV remote control code to
dInput selector:
You can use the
jCursor, lNumeric keys, and mTV
control keys to control a TV you have registered.
To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to
dInput selector:
You can use the
jCursor and lNumeric keys etc to control
external components, and the
mTV control keys to control
TVs registered in
mA.
J
2 : Use A/B for external component operations only. Set these keys to
remote control codes if you want to perform external component
operations without linking to input source selection of this unit.
For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes
for devices such as TVs.
En 54
SETUP
Controlling other components with the remote control
Registering remote control codes
for external component operations
The following section describes how to register remote
control code using an example of the registration of the
remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected
to HDMI2 jack.
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-
ROM to search the available remote control
codes from the category or manufacturer of
external components.
“2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player.
2
Press nCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
3
Press dHDMI2 on the remote control to
switch the input source to HDMI2. J1
Perform the following steps to register the selected
input source here to the remote control code.
4
Enter a remote control code “2064” using
lNumeric keys. J2
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
the remote control will blink twice.
5
To switch between BD player linked to
scene selections, press hSCENE and at the
same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for
approximately 3 seconds.
Then you can operate the external components by
switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting
HDMI2 in the registered scene.
Same steps for operating other external components,
press
hSCENE and at the same time press the input
source key selected in step 3 and hold it for
approximately 3 seconds.
dHDMI2
hSCENE
lNumeric keys
mTV control keys
mA
nCODE SET
SCENE
2
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
7856
90
1234
TV
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
INPUT
MUTE
10
R
E
C
ENT
RECEIVER
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
UP
RETURN
V
O
L
U
M
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R
.
DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
MI
A
V
A
A
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
3
1
2
3
1
5
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
M
U
T
E
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
SOU
R
C
E
D
OCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
n
m
l
h
d
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1
minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
from step 2.
Remote control code of an external component cannot
be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use
Remote Control Code Search
” in the CD-ROM to
search the available remote control codes from the
category or manufacturer of external components.
If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first
code in the list, if it does not work then try the other
codes.
If the registration fails, repeat the step 2.
In case of an external component with multiple remote
control codes, the other remote control codes may be
supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote
control codes.
2 0
6
4
TRANSMIT
R
ECEIVE
R
HDMI
SLEE
P
SOU
R
CE
C
ODE SE
T
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
J
1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV
control keys, press
mA (mTV control keys) in step 3.
J
2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV
control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4.
En 55
SETUP
Controlling other components with the remote control
Resetting all remote control codes
Resetting all remote control codes for external
components to the initial factory settings.
1
Press nCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
2
Press iSETUP on the remote control.
3
Enter “9981” using lNumeric keys.
i
SETUP
lNumeric keys
nCODE SET
SETUP
7856
90
1234
CODE SET
10
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
E
NTER
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
n
l
i
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1
minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
from step 2.
TRANSMIT
R
ECEIVE
R
HDMI
SLEE
P
SOU
R
CE
C
ODE SE
T
blinks twice
Once the remote control code is registered
successfully the remote control will blink twice.
If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
9 9
8
1
TRANSMIT
R
ECEIVE
R
HDMI
SLEE
P
SOU
R
CE
C
ODE SE
T
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
En 56
SETUP
The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows.
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup
menu
1
Set this unit to the standby mode.
2
Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on
the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on
the front panel display.
After approximately 3 seconds, the top menu items are displayed.
3
Use PROGRAM to select the item to be set from the
following items.
In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings.
4
Press STRAIGHT a few times to select the value you
wish to change.
5
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
switch it on again.
The settings become effective and the unit is powered on. If
initialization is selected, it will be performed when the unit is
powered on again.
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
A
PROGRAM l / h
REMOTEID-ID1
REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.
TU (Asia and
General models
only)
Selects one of the following FM/AM frequency steps.
INIT Initializes various settings for this unit.
En 57
SETUP
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
Avoiding crossing remote control
signals when using multiple
Yamaha receivers
The remote control of the unit can only receive signals
from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote
control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers,
you can set each remote control with a unique remote
control ID for its corresponding receiver.
On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote
control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote
control to operate 2 receivers.
Changing FM/AM frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
You can select one of the following FM/AM frequency
steps: J1
Initializing various settings for this
unit
Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it
back to default.
Select the items to be initialized from the following.
i
SETUP
lNumeric keys
nCODE SET
SETUP
7856
90
1234
CODE SET
10
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
E
NTER
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
n
l
i
ID1 (Default) Receives the remote control signals set in
ID1.
ID2 Receives the remote control signals set in
ID2.
ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by
default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the
remote control ID for both remote control and
receiver.
REMOTEID-ID1
To change the remote control ID
1
Press nCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
2
Press iSETUP on the remote control.
3
Enter the desired remote control ID code.
To switch to ID1:
Enter “5019” using
lNumeric keys.
To switch to ID2:
Enter “5020” using
lNumeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered
successfully the remote control will blink twice.
Perform each of the following steps within
1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if
more than 1 minute passes since the last operation.
To reset, repeat from step 1.
TRANSMIT
R
ECEIVE
R
HDMI
SLEE
P
SOU
R
CE
C
ODE SE
T
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is
initialized (
p. 55).
AM10/FM100 You can adjust the AM frequency by
steps of 10kHz and FM by steps of
100kHz.
AM9/FM50
(Default)
You can adjust the AM frequency by
steps of 9kHz and FM by steps of 50kHz.
DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound
field programs.
ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings.
CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize.
TU-AM9/FM50
INIT-CANCEL
J
1 : For details on setting FM/AM frequency steps, refer to “FM/AM
tuning” (
p. 30).
En 58
SETUP
This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to
operate external components via HDMI. If you connect devices
that support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link-
compatible TVs, DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) J1, you can
use the following operations with the remote control of any of
those devices:
Power synchronization (on/standby)
Volume control, including Mute
Changing the volume of the audio output signal device (either the
TV or this unit)
1
Connect the TV, DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control to this unit’s HDMI output jack.
2
Turn on the TV and this unit.
Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external
components.
3
Press iSETUP. J2
4
Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup” and
press jENTER.
5
Make sure that “Control” is selected, and then use
jCursor D / E to select “On.
Press iSETUP when you have finished changing the setting.
6
Set the TV/DVD recorder’s HDMI Control function to
On.
Check the instruction manuals for those devices.
7
Turn the TV off.
Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the
TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually.
8
Turn the TV on.
Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If
it is still off, turn it on manually.
9
Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that
is connected to this unit (ex. HDMI1).
10
If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control
function are connected to this unit, turn them on.
11
Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized
with the TV through the following operations by
using the TV remote control.
Power On/Off
Volume Control
Switching between audio output devices
Using the HDMI Control function
NOTE
The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV,
and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and
DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below.
Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On”
Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect
this unit to the TV
HDMI
Control signal
(such as volume control)
Remote control of TV
This unit
TV
HDMI connection
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;Off
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;;On
HDMI
VOL.
Receiver unit Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder
has been selected. If a different input source has been
selected, please change it manually.
TV/DVD Recorder Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is
being properly received by the TV.
Operations 1-10 will not be required more than twice.
If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations,
check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both
devices.
If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and re-
plugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the
problem.
J
1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same
manufacturer whenever possible.
J
2 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (p. 42) for details on
the Setup menu.
En 59
SETUP
Using the HDMI Control function
Switching the input source on this
unit automatically when listening
to TV audio
When the HDMI Control (p. 58) is operating properly,
the input source of this unit is automatically changed to
match operations carried out on the TV. The default
input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack is
connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can
enjoy TV sound through this unit right away.
To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry
out the following procedure.
1
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
cable.
2
Connect TV’s audio output to this unit.
The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s
audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the
TV.
3
Press iSETUP. J1
4
Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup”
and press jENTER.
5
Make sure that “Control” is selected, and
then use jCursor D / E to select “On.
6
Press jCursor C to select “TVAudio” and
select the input jack connected in step 2
using jCursor D / E.
7
Press iSETUP when you have finished
changing the settings.
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this
unit will automatically switch to the input source
chosen in step 6.
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
SETUP
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
A
L
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
CO
AXIA
L
(
CD
)
CO
AXIA
L
VIDE
O
HDMI
1
(
BD
/
DVD
)
HDMI
2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
V
IDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
OU
T
MO
NIT
O
R
OUT
AV
OUT
A
D
OCK
A
RC
OPTICAL
O
O
Audio output
(Optical)
TV
TV output jack Input jack
Optical digital audio output AV1 or AV4 (default)
Coaxial digital audio output AV2 or AV3
Analog stereo output AV5, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CO
MP
O
NENT
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
V
IDE
O
HDMI 1
(
B
D
/
DVD
)
HDMI 2
H
DMI
3
HDMI
4
C
OMPONENT
VIDE
O
M
O
NIT
O
R
O
UT
HDMI
OU
T
MO
NIT
O
R
O
U
T
AV
O
UT
AU
DI
O
O
U
T
D
OC
K
Y
P
B
P
R
AR
C
Available input jacks
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;Off
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;;On
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
TVAudio;;;;AV4
HDMI
VOL.
J
1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (p. 42)
for details on the Setup menu.
En 60
SETUP
Using the HDMI Control function
Single HDMI cable input to TV
audio with Audio Return Channel
function
When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and
Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output
from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to
this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable
(Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals
transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to
any input source.
1
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
cable.
2
Press iSETUP. J1
3
Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup”
and press jENTER.
4
Make sure that “Control” is selected, and
then use jCursor D / E to select “On.
5
Press jCursor C to select “TVAudio” and
select the input source that you want to
assign to the HDMI audio signals from the
TV using jCursor D / E. J2
6
Press jCursor C to select “ARC” and
press jCursor E to select “On.
The Audio Return Channel function will turn on.
7
Press iSETUP when you have finished
changing the settings.
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this
unit will automatically switch to the input source
chosen in step 6.
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
SETUP
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
ENT
TV
TV V
O
L TV
C
H
I
NPUT
M
U
T
E
RECEIVER
SC
ENE
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN
VO
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
E
R
SU
R. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
H
DMI
AV
A
UDI
O
TRAN
S
MI
T
S
LEE
P
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
V-A
U
X
TUNER
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
B
D
D
VD
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
T
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOU
R
C
E
CO
DE
S
E
T
D
OC
K
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
HDMI
OUT
ARC
P
R
P
B
HDMI
1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
H
DMI
3
HDMI 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
D
OC
K
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
TV
TV audio
output
Video / Audio
output
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;Off
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;;On
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
ARC;;;;;;;;;On
HDMI
VOL.
J
1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (p. 42)
for details on the Setup menu.
J
2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected
for the input source cannot be used.
En 61
APPENDIX
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The power will not
turn on.
The protection circuitry operated
three times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, when the protection
circuitry operates three times consecutively,
the capability to turn on the power is
disabled. Please contact your nearest
Yamaha dealer or service center to request
repair.
The unit enters
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not completely
inserted.
Connect the power cable properly to an AC
wall outlet.
(When this unit is turned back on
and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is
displayed.) The protection
circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on
while a speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between
this unit and speakers are connected
properly.
11
This unit cannot be
turned off or does
not work properly.
The internal microcomputer is
hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or
excessive static electricity) or by a
drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC
wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then
plug it in again.
The batteries in the remote control
may have lost their charge.
Replace all batteries. 4
The unit enters
standby mode.
The protection circuitry has been
activated because of a short circuit,
etc.
Check that the speaker with an impedance
of at least 6Ω.
After display of a
countdown on the
front panel, the unit
goes into standby
mode.
If you do not use take any action,
the Auto Power Down function
operates.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again.
In the Setup menu “AutoPowerDown”
(“Func. Setup” AutoPowerDown”),
increase the time until switching to standby
mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down
function.
50
“Internal Error” is
displayed on the
front panel display.
An internal error has occurred. Please contact authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center to request repair.
Sound/images
suddenly go off.
The protection circuitry has been
activated because of a short circuit,
etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not
touching each other, then turn the unit back
on.
The sleep timer has turned off the
unit.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
En 62
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
15
If a DVI-HDMI cable is used to
connect the unit with an external
component, then it is necessary to
use an audio input jack for a
different input to output audio.
Display the HDMI Input Option menu for
the connected cable, select “Audio In,” and
select the jack to use for audio input.
40
Speaker connections are not
secure.
Secure the connections. 11
The HDMI components connected
to the unit do not support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
40
The audio input into the device is
set to playback through the TV.
In the Setup menu, set the HDMI Audio Out
(“HDMI Setup” Audio”) to other than
“TV.
48
No appropriate input source has
been selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
dInput selector (on the remote control).
25
The volume is turned down or
muted.
Turn up the volume.
Signals that this unit cannot
reproduce are being input from a
source component, such as a CD-
ROM.
Use an input source that has signals that can
be reproduced on this unit.
No picture. A video jack (ex. Video input
HDMI output) type different to the
input video is being used to try to
display content on the TV.
Use video jacks of the same type (ex. Video
input Video output) to connect to the TV.
13
An appropriate video input is not
selected on the TV.
Select an appropriate video input on the TV.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No sound is output
from a specific
speaker.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
Check the Speaker indicators on
the front panel display. If the
corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check
if sound is output.
If sound is not output, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
7
The playback component or
speakers are not connected
properly.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
11, 15
Output from that speaker is
disabled.
Check the Speaker indicators on the front
panel display. If the corresponding indicator
is turned off, try the following.
1) Change to a different input source.
2) With the selected sound field program,
sound is not output from that speaker. Select
another sound field program.
3) “None” may have been selected for that
speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker
Setup” in the Setup menu, and set respective
parameters to enable output from that
speaker (“Speaker Setup” “Config”).
7, 43
The volume of that speaker is set
to the minimum in “Speaker
Setup” in the Setup menu.
Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu
and adjust the volume (“Speaker Setup”
“Level”).
44
(If hardly any sound comes from
one channel)
Speaker output balance is not set
correctly.
Balance the volume of each speaker from
“Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker Setup”
“Level”).
44
Sound may not be output from
certain channels, depending on the
input source or sound field
program.
Try another sound field program. 26
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When a monaural source sound
field program is applied, for some
surround decoders, sound from all
channels is output from the center
speaker.
Try another sound field program. 26
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
En 63
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
This unit is in straight decoding
mode and a monaural source is
being played back.
Press gSTRAIGHT (on the remote
control) to exit straight decoding mode.
27
Sound may not be output from
certain channels depending on
input sources or sound field
programs.
Try another sound field program. 26
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
A subwoofer is not connected, or it
is disabled.
Check that a subwoofer is connected
correctly, and from the Setup menu
“Subwoofer” (“Speaker Setup” “Config”
“Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to
“On.
43
The subwoofer is turned off. Turn the subwoofer power on.
If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power
Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off
sensitivity settings.
The source does not contain LFE
(p. 68) or low frequency signals.
The right
combination of audio
/ video jacks to
connect cannot be
found.
Combine input connected to the
external component video output
with another input audio jack.
Select a desired input source (HDMI1-4 or
AV1-2) as a video input and select a audio
input source from “Audio In” in the Option
menu.
40
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format.
The connected component is not
set to output the desired digital
audio signals.
Set the playback component properly
referring to its instruction manual.
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency
equipment.
This unit is too close to other
digital or radio frequency
equipment.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Noise/hum noise is
heard.
Incorrect cable connection.
Connect the audio cables properly.
If the problem persists, the cables may be
defective.
A DTS-CD is being played back. If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly
input to this unit, only noise is output.
Connect the playback component to this
unit by digital connection and play back the
DTS-CD.
If the condition is not resolved, the problem
may result from the playback component.
Consult the manufacturer of the playback
component.
The volume cannot
be increased, or the
sound is distorted.
The component connected to the
output jacks of this unit is not
turned on.
When the component connected to the
output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the
sound may be distorted, or the volume may
decreased due to the nature of AV receivers.
Turn on all components connected to this
unit.
“Max Volume” is set to a low
value.
Set it to a higher value. 47
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
En 64
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
HDMI™ Tuner (FM/AM)
FM
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The front panel
display HDMI
indicator is flashing.
An error with the HDMI
connection has occurred.
Try re-inserting the HDMI cable.
Confirm that HDMI video that is not
supported by the unit is not being input
(HDMI Input Option menu “Signal
Info”).
40
No picture or sound. The number of components is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI components.
The connected HDMI component
does not support high-bandwidth
digital copyright protection
(HDCP).
Connect an HDMI component that supports
HDCP.
(When using HDMI
Control function)
TV sound is not
output from this unit
when operating the
remote control of the
TV.
The TV audio output is not
connected to this unit, or the
setting to match operations carried
out on TV is not set.
Connect the TV audio output to this unit,
and then select the connected input source
in “TVAudio” (Setup menu HDMI Setup
TVAudio).
48
(When using Audio Return
Channel function)
The Audio Return Channel
function is not working.
Make sure that your TV supports Audio
Return Channel.
Set the Audio Return Channel function to
on (Setup menu HDMI Setup ARC).
48
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM stereo reception
is noisy.
You are too far from the station
transmitter, or the input from the
antenna is weak.
Check the antenna connections. 20
Switch to monaural mode. 31
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi-element antenna.
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or
place it in a different location.
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
You are in an area far from a
station, or input from the antenna
is weak.
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi element antenna.
Use eTUNING H / I (on the remote
control) to manually select the station.
31
“No Presets” is
displayed.
No preset stations are registered. Register stations you wish to listen to as
preset stations before operation.
31
“Wrong Station” is
displayed.
An invalid FM/AM frequency has
been input.
Input a frequency that can be received.
En 65
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
AM
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak, or the antenna
connections are loose.
Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 20
Use the manual tuning method. 30
Automatic station
preset does not
work.
Automatic station preset is not
available for AM stations.
Use manual station preset. 32
Continuous
crackling and
hissing noises are
heard.
The supplied AM loop antenna is
not connected.
Connect the AM loop antenna correctly
even if you use an outdoor antenna.
20
The noises may be caused by
lightning, fluorescent lamps,
motors, thermostats, or other
electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,
but it can be reduced by installing and
properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.
20
Buzzing and whining
noises are heard.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 20 ft / 6 m, and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from
an inverter type of fluorescent
lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking
the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this
unit.
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4
The remote control ID of the
remote control and this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and
the remote control.
57
External components
cannot be controlled
using the remote
control.
The remote control code is not
correctly set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
Remote control code search” on the CD-
ROM.
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer using “Remote control code
search” on the CD-ROM.
If this unit does not work when you press
jCursor B / C / D / E (on the remote
control), do the following.
When the key does not work during DVD
disc menu operation: press the dInput
selector (on the remote control) again.
When the key does not work during Option
menu/Setup menu operation: press the key
corresponding to the current menu operation
again.
Even if the remote control code is correctly
set, there are some models that do not
respond to the remote control.
En 66
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
iPod™/iPhone™ Bluetooth™
Display Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading... The unit is in the process of
recognizing the connection with
your iPod/iPhone.
The unit is in the middle of
acquiring song lists from your
iPod/iPhone.
Connect error There is a problem with the signal
path from your iPod/iPhone to the
unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha
iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of
the unit.
35
Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha
iPod universal dock and then place it back in
the dock.
35
Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not
supported by the unit.
Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the
unit.
iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly
placed in the Yamaha iPod
universal dock.
Disconnected Your iPod/iPhone is removed from
the Yamaha iPod universal dock.
Unable to play The unit cannot play back the
songs currently stored on your
iPod/iPhone.
Check that songs are currently stored on
your iPod/iPhone.
Display Cause Remedy
See
page
Searching... The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and the Bluetooth
component are in the process of
pairing.
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and the Bluetooth
component are in the process of
establishing a connection.
Completed The pairing is completed.
Canceled The pairing is canceled.
BT connected The connection between the
Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver and the Bluetooth
component is established.
Disconnected The Bluetooth component is
disconnected from the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
Not found The Bluetooth component is not
found.
During pairing:
pairing must be performed on the
Bluetooth component and this unit
simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth
component is in pairing mode.
During connecting:
check if the Bluetooth component is
turned on.
check if the Bluetooth component is
within 32 feet (10 m) of the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
En 67
APPENDIX
Audio information
Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that
involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video
signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user
adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video
syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization
automatically and accurately without user interaction.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely
independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and
center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range
audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects,
referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-
channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic
range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5
full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using
digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement
and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a
5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers
of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete
5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel,
and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel
for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and
“Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce
realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo),
a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special
sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a
narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all
video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts.
The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal
processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel
to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for
high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby
TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel
sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS
decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical
48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers
sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-
channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of
movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining
popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural
spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system
produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left,
right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as
a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels).
DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray
discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the
case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling
you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while
playing the main program.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc.
Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering
a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master
Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the
optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD
Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital
storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as
single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common
occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the
PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or
higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can
transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack.
Glossary
En 68
APPENDIX
Glossary
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency
range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only
enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by
the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback
by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels
with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are
two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode”
for movie sources.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is
used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses
a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of
time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded
as pulses and then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is
sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of
accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the
number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is
determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of
quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.
Sound field program information
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for
use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many
speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as
room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so
widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses
Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby
Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie
theater in the listening room of your own home.
Compressed music enhancer
The Compressed music enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression
artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-
frequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for
headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field
program, so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you
to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a
center speaker.
Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into
the Y signal for luminance and the P
B and PR signals for chrominance.
Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of
these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color
signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output
component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the
three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component
transmits these three elements combined.
Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the
24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit
depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to
billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast
ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry
supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an
interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and
audio/video monitors (such as digital TV), HDMI supports standard,
enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio
using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate
future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the
security requirements of content providers and system operators. For
further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/.
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that
were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color
gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can
thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still
pictures and computer graphics.
En 69
APPENDIX
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections.
Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS, DTS-HD and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD Master
Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
iPod™, iPhone™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark
of Apple Inc.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a
license agreement.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Information on HDMI™
Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD,
etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
NOTES
When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,
depending on the type of the DVD player.
This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the
component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the
component).
This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents
downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio
commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.
480i/60 Hz
576i/50 Hz
480p/60 Hz
576p/50 Hz
720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
About trademarks
En 70
APPENDIX
INPUT/OUTPUT
Input jacks
HDMI input x 4
AV input x 5
[Audio] Digital input (optical) x 2, digital input (coaxial) x 2,
analog input x 1
[Video] Component video jacks x 2, video jacks x 3
AUDIO input x 2
[Audio] Analog jack x 2
VIDEO AUX input x 1
[Audio] Analog x 1, stereo mini jack x 1
[Video] Video jack x 1
Output jacks
TV output (monitor output) x 3
[Audio/Video] HDMI x 1
[Video] Component video jack x 1, video jack x 1
AV output x 2
[Audio] Analog jack x 1
[Video] Video jack x 1
AUDIO output x 1
[Audio] Analog jack x 1
HDMI
HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync,
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
•Audio Format
- Dolby Digital
- DTS
- DSD 6ch
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby TrueHD
- DTS-HD
- PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit)
Content Protection: HDCP compatible
Compatible Decoding Formats
Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express
- Dolby Digital
- DTS, DTS 96/24
Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
FRONT L/R........................................................................100 W/ch
CENTER .................................................................................100 W
SURROUND L/R...............................................................100 W/ch
[Other models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
FRONT L/R........................................................................100 W/ch
CENTER .................................................................................100 W
SURROUND L/R...............................................................100 W/ch
Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω .................................. 110/130/160/180 W
[Other models]
Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω ............................................ 105/130/150 W
Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[China, Korea, General and Asia models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ............................................................135 W
Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...........................................................120 W
IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models]
Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .........................95 W+95 W
Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω ........................................................................................ 0.23 dB
Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
AV5, etc .....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ
Maximum Input Voltage
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD)..................................... 2.3 V or more
Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω)...................................100 mV/470 Ω
Frequency Response
AV5 to FRONT .....................................10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
AV 5 , e t c . t o F RO N T
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)........ 0.06% or less
[Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω) ............................. 0.06% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)
................................................................................. 98 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front Speakers ........................................................... 150 µV or less
Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) ...........................60 dB/45 dB or more
Volume Control ...................................... MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Tone Control (Front Speakers)
BASS Boost/Cut ............................................ ±10 dB/2 dB at 50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ..................................... ±10 dB/2 dB at 20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency.............................................. 3.5 kHz
Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ....................................... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ............................................................ 24 dB/oct.
Specifications
En 71
APPENDIX
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] .........................NTSC
[Other models]............................................................................PAL
Signal Level
Composite......................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (P
B/PR)
Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)....... 1.5 Vp-p or more
Signal to Noise Ratio ....................................................50 dB or more
Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion Off)............ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, ±3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...............................87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ........... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models].................................................87.50 to 108.00 MHz
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono..................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo.................................................................. 74 dB/69 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3%
Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω
AM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...................................530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]..................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................................531 to 1611 kHz
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models].................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General models]......................... AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model].........................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ........................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia models] ............................................ AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .....................................250 W/320 VA
[Other models] ........................................................................250 W
Standby Power Consumption
[General models] ..........................................................1.0 W or less
[Other models] ..............................................................0.5 W or less
Dimensions (W x H x D)
435 x 151 x 315 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 12-3/8 in)
Weight
7.5 kg (16.5 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
A
Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 56
AM tuning .................................................................................... 30
Antenna connection ..................................................................... 20
Audio Return Channel function ................................................... 60
B
Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 37
C
Cable plug .................................................................................... 12
Connections.................................................................................... 9
E
External device connection .......................................................... 12
F
FM tuning.................................................................................... 30
Front panel .................................................................................... 5
Front panel display ........................................................................ 7
H
HDMI Control function............................................................... 58
I
iPod™/iPhone™ playback.......................................................... 35
J
Jack.............................................................................................. 12
O
Option menu ................................................................................ 39
R
Rear panel...................................................................................... 6
Remote control, Controlling other components .......................... 53
Remote control, Part names and functions.................................... 8
S
SCENE function .......................................................................... 26
Setup menu .................................................................................. 42
Sound field program.................................................................... 26
Sound field program parameter setting ....................................... 51
Speaker connection........................................................................ 9
Speaker setting ............................................................................ 21
Supplied accessories...................................................................... 4
Index
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation
YD283A0/OMEN3

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual AV Receiver English for Asia*, Africa, Oceania and Latin America *Except for China CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities ................................................... 3 About this manual............................................................. 4 Supplied accessories......................................................... 4 Part names and functions.................................................. 5 Front panel........................................................................ 5 Rear panel......................................................................... 6 Front panel display ........................................................... 7 Remote control ................................................................. 8 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers .......................................................... 9 Speaker channels and functions........................................ 9 Speaker layout ................................................................ 10 Connecting speakers....................................................... 10 Connecting external devices............................................ 12 Cable plugs and jacks ..................................................... 12 Connecting a TV monitor............................................... 13 Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices ............ 15 Connecting video cameras and portable audio players .. 19 Transmitting input A/V to external devices.................... 19 Connecting the FM/AM antennas .................................. 20 Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) .............................................................................. 21 PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure ............................................... 25 Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 25 Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) ............................................................ 26 Registering input sources/sound field program .............. 26 Enjoying sound field programs....................................... 26 Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders...... 26 Sound field programs ..................................................... 28 FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 30 Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 30 Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) ... 31 Clearing preset stations .................................................. 33 Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 35 Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock ................. 35 Controlling an iPod/iPhone ............................................ 35 Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components....... 37 Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ................................................................. 37 Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 37 Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 38 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) .................................................................. 39 Option menu display and setup ...................................... 39 Option menu items ......................................................... 39 Setting various functions (Setup menu)......................... 42 Setup menu display and settings .................................... 42 Setup menu items ........................................................... 42 Manages settings for speakers........................................ 43 Setting the audio output function of this unit................. 46 Setting HDMI functions ................................................. 47 Making the receiver easier to use ................................... 49 Setting sound field program parameters......................... 50 Prohibiting setting changes ............................................ 50 Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) ................................ 56 Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu............... 56 Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using multiple Yamaha receivers ............................................. 57 Changing FM/AM frequency steps (Asia and General models only)................................................................... 57 Initializing various settings for this unit ........................ 57 Using the HDMI Control function ................................. 58 APPENDIX Troubleshooting ............................................................... 61 General ........................................................................... 61 HDMI™ ......................................................................... 64 Tuner (FM/AM) ............................................................. 64 Remote control............................................................... 65 iPod™/iPhone™ ............................................................ 66 Bluetooth™ .................................................................... 66 Glossary ............................................................................ 67 Audio information.......................................................... 67 Sound field program information................................... 68 Video information .......................................................... 68 Information on HDMI™................................................. 69 About trademarks ........................................................... 69 Specifications.................................................................... 70 Index ................................................................................. 71 Setting sound field program parameters ....................... 51 Setting sound field parameters ....................................... 51 Controlling other components with the remote control .................................................................. 53 Keys connecting external components ........................... 53 Default remote control code settings.............................. 53 Registering remote control codes for external component operations ....................................................................... 54 Resetting all remote control codes ................................. 55 En 2 INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities ■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 5-channel amplifier ■ 1-button input/sound field program switching (SCENE function) .......................26 ■ Speaker connections for 2- to 5.1-channel configurations – – – – Speaker channels and functions .................................................................................................................9 Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................10 Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................10 Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................11 ■ Acoustic parameter adjustment to match your speakers and listening environment – Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters (YPAO - Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) ........................................................................21 – Specifying the settings for each speaker..................................................................................................43 – Volume control for each speaker..............................................................................................................44 – Speaker distance settings .........................................................................................................................44 – Sound quality control with the equalizer <Graphic Equalizer> ..............................................................45 – Test tone speaker adjustment ...................................................................................................................45 – Bass and treble level adjustment <Tone Control> ...................................................................................25 ■ External device connection and playback – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Cables and input/output jacks for this unit ..............................................................................................12 TV connection..........................................................................................................................................13 TV audio playback through this receiver.................................................................................................14 Connections for BD/DVD players (recorders) and other devices............................................................15 Audio signal output to the TV connected via the HDMI jack .................................................................48 Correction of lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync>...............................................................46 External audio and video recorder connections .......................................................................................19 HDMI/AV video input combining other audio input...............................................................................40 Front panel external device connections (for video cameras, portable music players, etc.)....................19 Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................4 Changing the input source names <Input Rename> ................................................................................49 Configuring the settings specific for each input source <Option menu> ................................................39 Playback from external devices ...............................................................................................................25 Playback from an iPod/iPhone (iPod/iPhone and components sold separately) .....................................35 Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................37 ■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback – – – – – Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................26 Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................27 Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................27 Sound field effect configuration ..............................................................................................................51 Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................26 ■ Front panel information display – Front panel display information switching ................................................................................................7 – Front panel display brightness adjustment <Dimmer>............................................................................50 – Digital video/audio signal information display <Signal Info> ................................................................40 ■ Volume/sound quality adjustment functions – – – – Easy listening at low volumes <Adaptive DRC> ....................................................................................46 Maximum volume settings.......................................................................................................................47 Startup volume settings............................................................................................................................47 Adjusting volume between input sources <Volume Trim> .....................................................................40 ■ Remote control operation – – – – Remote control names and functions.........................................................................................................8 Insert batteries into the remote control ......................................................................................................4 External device operation with this unit’s remote control .......................................................................53 Multiple Yamaha receiver operation without signal interference <Remote ID Switching>....................57 ■ Other features – – – – – Standby mode after prolonged non-operation <Auto Power Down function>........................................50 Standby mode after a specific amount of time <Sleep timer>...................................................................8 To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <iPod Standby Charge> .........................36 Initializing various settings for this unit ..................................................................................................57 Prohibiting setting changes <Memory Guard>........................................................................................50 ■ FM/AM Tuner – FM/AM broadcast listening .....................................................................................................................30 – Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................31 – Changing FM/AM frequency steps initializing various settings for this unit..........................................30 En 3 INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities About this manual • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the remote control. Refer to the “Remote control” (☞p. 8) for the information about each position of the parts. • J1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page. • ☞ indicates the page describing the related information. • Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to display the corresponding page in “Part names and functions.” Front panel Rear panel Front panel display Remote control ■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (included) ■ Installing batteries in the remote control To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks. To remove the cover, push the left section of it. When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+ and -). a Battery compartment cover c b Attach the cover Battery compartment Replace the batteries with new ones if the following symptoms become evident: • The remote control can only be operated within a narrow range. • bTRANSMIT does not light up, or only lights dimly. Supplied accessories PUSH Check that you received all of the following parts. NOTE • • • • • • If there are remote control codes for external components registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more than two minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote control, the remote control codes may be cleared. If this should occur, replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control codes. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2 YPAO microphone AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna VIDEO AUX input cover Remove the cover En 4 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions g AM Front panel h a A (Power) b c d e f Switches this unit between on and standby modes. YPAO MIC jack Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker balance automatically (☞p. 21). INFO Changes the information shown on the front panel display (☞p. 7). MEMORY Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞p. 32). J1 PRESET j / i Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞p. 33). J1 FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM (☞p. 30). J1 a b i j k l m TONE CONTROL Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM (☞p. 30). J1 TUNING jj / ii Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞p. 30). J1 Front panel display Displays information on this unit (☞p. 7). PHONES jack For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback can also be heard through the headphones. INPUT l / h Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order. SCENE Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single button (☞p. 26). Press this key when this unit is in standby mode to switch on the unit. c d e f g h INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING n o p q Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones (☞p. 25). PROGRAM l / h Switches between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are using and the surround sound decoder (☞p. 26). Press either the left or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order. STRAIGHT Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (☞p. 27). VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting video cameras, game consoles, and portable music players to this unit temporarily. Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack. VOLUME Adjusts the volume level. i YPAO MIC VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO SILENT CINEMA j VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT PORTABLE k l m n o VIDEO p L AUDIO R q J 1 : Usable when you have selected tuner input. En 5 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions Rear panel e COMPONENT VIDEO jacks a DOCK jack f b c d For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12) (☞p. 35) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞p. 37). HDMI OUT jack For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video signals to (☞p. 13). HDMI1-4 jacks For connecting external components equipped with HDMIcompatible outputs to receive audio/video signals from (☞p. 15). ANTENNA jacks For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞p. 20). a b g h i j AUDIO OUT jacks For connecting TV that are compatible with component video signals, using three cables to output video signal (☞p. 13). AV1-5 jacks For connecting to external devices equipped with audio/video outputs so that this unit can receive audio/video signals (☞p. 16, p. 17). AV OUT jacks For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV35 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞p. 19). AUDIO1-2 jacks For connecting to external components equipped with analog audio outputs to input sound into this unit (☞p. 18). MONITOR OUT jack For connecting a TV capable of receiving video input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 14). c HDMI 2 HDMI 1 m n Distinguishing the input and output jacks The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked in white to prevent connection errors. Use these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV or other external component. ANTENNA (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT l d ARC DOCK k For outputting audio signals received when analog inputs such as the AV5 or AUDIO1-2 jacks are selected (☞p. 19). SUBWOOFER jack For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (☞p. 11). SPEAKER terminals For connecting the front, center, and surround speakers (☞p. 11). VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) Select the switch position according to your local voltage (Refer to Quick Reference Guide). Power cord For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet. HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FM GND AM COMPONENT VIDEO VOLTAGE SELECTOR PR PR PB PB Output jacks SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND Y MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO 110V120V CENTER 220V240V MONITOR OUT VIDEO ARC DOCK ANTENNA (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FM GND COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SURROU Y OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 e f g h VIDEO SUBWOOFER i jk l m COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 SUBWOOFER AV 5 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 n En 6 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions f MUTE indicator Front panel display a HDMI indicator b c d e ■ Changing the front panel display Flashes when audio is muted. g VOLUME indicator Lights up when HDMI signals are input at the selected HDMI input source. CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP technology is selected. Tuner indicator Lights up when receiving an FM/AM broadcast. iPod CHARGE indicator Lights up when an iPod/iPhone is connected through an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12), and the iPod Standby Charge function is active (☞p. 36). SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (☞p. 8). h i j The front panel can display sound field programs and surround decoder names as well as the active input source. Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source → sound field program → surround decoder in order. J1 Displays the current volume level. Cursor indicators Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available for operations. Multi information display Displays a range of information on menu items and settings. Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. Input source name HDMI1 VOL. STRAIGHT Subwoofer Front speaker L Surround speaker L a L SL b SW C Center speaker R SR c STEREO TUNED i SW C R SR Sound field program (DSP program) Front speaker R Surround speaker R d e iPod CHARGE SLEEP f g VOL. MUTE L SL h L SL h SW C R SR j J 1 : While selecting a tuner input, the FM/AM frequency is displayed instead of the input source. En 7 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions a Remote control signal transmitter Remote control Transmits infrared signals. b TRANSMIT Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control. a c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power) b c Switches an external component on and off. CODE SET TRANSMIT n SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP p HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 o 1 d 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK e FM AM PRESET f INFO TUNING TUNER MEMORY g MUSIC STRAIGHT BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO q OPTION i VOLUME ENTER j RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE s Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM. Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM. Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes tuning frequencies. k Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name of the currently selected input source, the sound field program, the surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.)(☞p. 7). Switch between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are using and the surround decoder (☞p. 26). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 INPUT TV VOL Enter numbers. m TV control keys Operate a monitor such as a TV. n CODE SET Sets remote control codes for external component operations (☞p. 53, p. 57). o RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power) Switches this unit between on and standby modes. Sets this unit to place itself in standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to set the time for the sleep timer function. The front panel display indicator lights up when the sleep timer is activated. Sleep 120min. Sleep Off Sleep 90min. Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. h SCENE q OPTION Displays the Option menu for each input source (☞p. 39). r VOLUME +/Adjusts the volume level (☞p. 25). s MUTE Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞p. 25). Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single button (☞p. 26). Press this key when this unit is in standby mode to switch on the unit. i SETUP TV m ENT l Numeric keys f INFO g Sound selection keys REC l r FM AM MEMORY PRESET F / G TUNING H / I Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external components. J1 p SLEEP Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner input. STEREO SCENE h HDMI1-4 jacks AV1-5 jacks AUDIO1-2 jacks Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks Changes the external component you operating with the kExternal component operation keys without changing inputs. J1 A Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK jack. FM/AM tuner e Tuner keys ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE Select an input source on this unit from which to playback. DOCK TUNER Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when settings menus, etc are displayed. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen when setting menus are displayed, or ends the menu display. k External component operation keys d Input selector HDMI1-4 AV1-5 AUDIO1-2 V-AUX [A]/[B] AV j Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN TV CH Displays a detailed Setup menu for this unit (☞p. 42). MUTE J 1 : You can use separate kExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input in advance if you wish to operate external components (☞p. 53). En 8 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and connections in your listening environment. ■ Surround left and right speakers Speaker channels and functions The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1-channel speakers providing reararea sounds. ■ Front left and right speakers The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds. Ex. Ex. Front speaker layout: Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom. ■ Center speaker Surround speaker layout: Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the speaker tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor. ■ Subwoofer The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a subwoofer that is equipped with an internal amplifier. The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Ex. Center speaker layout: Place it halfway between the left and right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. Ex. Subwoofer speaker layout: Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce echoes from the wall. En 9 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Speaker layout Connecting speakers 5.1-channel speaker layout (5 speakers + subwoofer) Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel. Front speaker Front speaker R Surround speaker R R L L Front speaker L Subwoofer ANTENNA HDMI 4 FM GND AM SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND CENTER OR OUT Surround speaker R AUDIO 2 60q 60q AUDIO OUT SUBWOOFER 80q 80q Center speaker Subwoofer Center speaker Surround speaker L CAUTION • Connect at least two speakers (front left and right). • If you cannot connect all five speakers, give priority to the surround speakers. • The surround speakers should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position. ■ CRT monitors We recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers to avoid video distortion, especially for the front and center speakers near the screen. If your screen still gets interference from magnetically shielded speakers, move the speakers farther away from your TV. • Remove the AC power cord of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. • Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+” (positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “-” (minus, black) terminal. • Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on. En 10 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ Connecting front speakers KE RS ■ Connecting center speakers / surround speakers 3 FR ON SU EA KE NT ER 1 1 3 4 2 3 4 SP ND CE T 2 1 RR OU ■ Connecting the subwoofer 2 Remove approximately 10mm of insulation from the ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires of the cables together firmly so that they will not cause short circuits. Loosen the speaker terminals. Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap on the side of the terminal. 1 2 3 Press the tab on the speaker terminal down. Insert the speaker cable end into the terminal. Lift the tab to fix the speaker cable in place. 1 Connect the subwoofer input jack to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit with an audio pin cable. 2 Set the subwoofer volume as follows. Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than half). Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum. VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT Tighten the terminal. MIN Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer examples Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. KE RS FR ON T Banana plug En 11 CONNECTIONS Connecting external devices ■ Audio jacks Cable plugs and jacks The main unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are going to connect. ■ Audio/Video jacks OPTICAL jacks COAXIAL jacks These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals. Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio signals. These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use pin cables for digital audio signals. HDMI jacks Digital audio fiber-optic cable Digital audio pin cable Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack. Only use an HDMI cable. HDMI cable • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. • We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. PORTABLE jack These jacks transmit conventional analog audio signals. Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L jack. This jack transmits conventional analog audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable when connecting. Stereo audio pin cable ■ Analog video jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks VIDEO jack The signal is separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use component video pin cables with three plugs. This jack transmits conventional analog video signals. Use video pin cables. Component video pin cable AUDIO jacks Stereo mini-plug cable Video pin cable En 12 CONNECTIONS Connecting external devices ■ Connecting an HDMI video monitor Connecting a TV monitor Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack. This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV. HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input signal format supported by your TV. HDMI ARC HDMI OUT jack DOCK HDMI input (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB HDMI HDMI ARC Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT DOCK HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 MONITOR OUT VIDEO HDMI 4 TV COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB OPTICAL AV 1 Y MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO jacks (MONITOR OUT) COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack (MONITOR OUT) Video signals input from a particular type of jack(s) are output from the same type of jack(s). For example, these three output devices must be connected to the monitor by matching input/output jacks and cables, and then you must change the TV’s input mode to the proper setting. • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. • We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. • When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function, audio/video signals can be transmitted mutually between the unit and TV with a single HDMI cable (☞p. 60). ■ Connecting a component video monitor Input Output HDMI HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks. TV Component video input HDMI input VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Component video input ARC PR DOCK VIDEO Video input (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y MONITOR OUT PR PB Y PB PR Y PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 MONITOR OUT VIDEO TV COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT En 13 CONNECTIONS Connecting external devices ■ Connecting a video monitor When using other TVs Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack. To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect its AV1-5 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio output jacks. Depending on the connection on TV, connect the TV’s audio output to the AV1-5 or AUDIO1-2. ARC DOCK Video input (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR TV audio output Connection Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a digital audio pin cable. Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a fiber-optic cable. Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AV5, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, or V-AUX with a stereo pin cable. VIDEO PR V PB Y MONITOR OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO TV V OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT ■ Listening to TV audio Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound. If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output to the receiver’s AV4 jack. Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation using the SCENE function (☞p. 26). To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV: When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI Control function When your TV supports both HDMI Control (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the unit are possible using a single HDMI cable. The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that makes TV sound control easier to use. For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return Channel function” (☞p. 60). Available input jacks Audio output (Optical) ARC DOCK HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL PR PR PB PB O Y MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO TV O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) OPTICAL AV OUT AUDIO OUT When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV. For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 59). You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control code (☞p. 53). En 14 CONNECTIONS Connecting external devices CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on the external components. AV AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK Input jack TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC Audio input HDMI1 HDMI HDMI HDMI2 HDMI HDMI HDMI3 HDMI HDMI HDMI4 SCENE TV CD SETUP HDMI/Audio (Optical) output q VOLUME ENTER HDMI j ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI PR PR PB PB HDMI HDMI HDMI AV1 Component video Optical AV2 Component video Coaxial digital AV3 Video Coaxial digital AV4 Video Optical AV5 Video Analog (Stereo) AUDIO1 — Analog (Stereo) AUDIO2 — Analog (Stereo) VIDEO AUX Video Analog (Stereo) Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y OPTICAL MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO O RADIO OPTION RETURN Video input This unit can use the AV1-5 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from other audio input sources. For example, if an external device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack, use the following method to change the audio input. STEREO STRAIGHT BD DVD ■ Receiving audio from other input sources d O OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT BD/DVD player DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU 1 2 3 4 MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV TV VOL ENT ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with HDMI INPUT TV CH MUTE Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-4 jacks. Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) that the external device is connected to for playback. d Input selector j Cursor C / D / E j ENTER q OPTION Use the dInput selector to select the desired HDMI input source. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1 Press jCursor C until “Audio In” is displayed, and then press jENTER. Press jCursor D / E to select the audio input source. Inputs that change the audio source HDMI1 Audio;;;;;;AV1 ARC DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT VOL. L SL SW C R SR COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI HDMI output PR PR PB PB Y HDMI MONITOR OUT Assignable audio input jacks If you have selected AV1 input audio (optical digital) Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO 5 HDMI OPTICAL AV 1 BD/DVD player COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 Once you have completed the setup, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. AUDIO OUT J 1 : See the section on “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” for details on the Option menu (☞p. 39). En 15 CONNECTIONS Connecting external devices ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component cables ■ Component connections to analog audio output devices Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks. Component video / Audio output Using optical digital audio output sources Select the AV1 input that the external device is connected to for playback. COMPONENT VIDEO PR ARC Component video / Audio (Optical) output PB Y PR AUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO ARC PB L Y PR (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 MONITOR OUT HDMI 4 R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK PR HDMI 3 HDMI 4 PB Y PR PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO L PR PR R OPTICAL PB Y Y PB AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO OUT AUDIO 2 PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT OPTICAL HDMI 2 HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO O Game console O OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT BD/DVD player Using coaxial digital audio output sources Select the AV2 input that the external device is connected to for playback. Component video / Audio (Coaxial) output AV1 COMPONENT VIDEO DOCK L SL SW C R SR (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB PR PR Y PB PB Y COAXIAL VOL. Audio;;;AUDIO1 ARC PR You can use the video input from the AV1-2 jacks in combination with the audio input from other AV inputs or AUDIO1-2. When connecting these devices, select the AV3-5 or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input for AV1 or AV2. See “Receiving audio from other input sources” (☞p. 15) for detailed setup guidance. Select the AV input source (AV1-2) that is connected by component video cable to the external device for playback. MONITOR OUT PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO C C OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT BD/DVD player En 16 CONNECTIONS Connecting external devices ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables Connect the external device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-5 input jacks. Using analog stereo audio output sources Select the AV5 input that the external device is connected to for playback. Using optical digital audio output sources Select the AV4 input that the external device is connected to for playback. Video / Audio output ARC DOCK HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 PR PR PB PB PB PB Y MONITOR OUT L HDMI 4 V Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO L R V Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT HDMI 3 HDMI 4 AUDIO V OPTICAL PR (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO PR V ARC Video / Audio (Optical) output HDMI 2 HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT R OPTICAL MONITOR OUT VIDEO AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT O O OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) TV AV 3 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT BD/DVD player BD/DVD player Using coaxial digital audio output sources Select the AV3 input that the external device is connected to for playback. ARC DOCK Video / Audio (Coaxial) output VIDEO V (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB Y MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO V MONITOR OUT VIDEO COAXIAL C C OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) AV 1 AV 2 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT BD/DVD player En 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting external devices ■ Connecting CD players and other audio devices Using coaxial digital output sources Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) that the external device is connected to for playback. Using analog stereo output sources Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) that the external device is connected to for playback. ARC DOCK HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO ARC DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 PR PR PB PB HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO Audio output PR Audio (Coaxial) output PR Y PB MONITOR OUT PB AUDIO Y COMPONENT VIDEO L Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT C C MONITOR OUT VIDEO R MONITOR OUT VIDEO COAXIAL L OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) AV 1 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT R OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT CD player CD player We recommend connecting audio devices with an coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD” SCENE key (☞p. 26). Using optical digital output sources Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) that the external device is connected to for playback. ARC DOCK HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB Audio (Optical) output Y MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO OPTICAL O O OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) TV AV 3 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT CD player En 18 CONNECTIONS Connecting external devices Connecting video cameras and portable audio players Transmitting input A/V to external devices Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect video cameras, game consoles, or portable audio devices to the receiver. Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices. This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external devices through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external devices. Video / Audio input RADIO VIDEO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT V PORTABLE VIDEO V L L AUDIO AUDIO R L R R AUDIO ARC AUDIO OUT L DOCK Audio output Audio output (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO R PR PR PB PB VIDEO V Video output VCR V Y MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO L R OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 Audio input L AV 5 AUDIO R AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT L R Portable audio player Video cameras • Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices. • When external components are connected to both the PORTABLE jack and the AUDIO jacks, the sound output from the PORTABLE jack is transmitted. Audio recorder Using the AV OUT jacks Connect this jacks to the external device’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks. Using the AUDIO OUT jacks Connect this jack to the external device’s analog audio input jacks. HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted from these jacks. En 19 CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM/AM antennas An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are included with this receiver. Connect these antennas properly to their respective jacks. AM loop antenna Position the AM antenna away from the receiver. The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the GND jack. Indoor FM antenna HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FM GND AM SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND CENTER MONITOR OUT Connecting the AM loop antenna Press and hold Insert Release ■ Improving FM reception We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized dealer. ■ Improving AM reception Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5-10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop antenna is still connected. Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground. The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet. En 20 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) This unit is equipped with a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings for which specialist knowledge is usually needed, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room in which this unit is placed). J1 When you use YPAO, a test tone will be output from the speakers for approximately three minutes and acoustic measuring will be performed. When using YPAO, be careful of the following. 2 4 Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards. • The test tone is output at high volume. Please refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others nearby. • Please take care that the test tone does not frighten any small children. 1 Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in your listening position. YPAO microphone YPAO MIC INFO Check the following before using YPAO. This unit • The headphones are removed. Subwoofer • The power is turned on. • The auto power-off function (if present) is set to off. • Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if present) is set to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod) as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod screws to fix the microphone in place. 3 Switch this unit on. “MIC ON. YPAO START” appears on the front panel display, and then changes to display the following. J2 YPAO Press[SETUP] VOL. L SL SW C R SR Continues to the next page MAX Subwoofer examples J 1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance. J 2 : To cancel measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone. En 21 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER This completes preparations. To achieve more accurate results, be careful of the following when measuring. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV • Measuring will take approximately three minutes. Keep the room as quiet as possible during measurement. • Wait in the corner of the listening room during measurement or leave it entirely, to avoid becoming an obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO microphone. AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC 6 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV RADIO i VOLUME j CD SETUP OPTION ENTER RETURN 5 Press iSETUP to start measurement. YPAO POP-UP MENU MUTE REC YPAO Set>Cancel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE ENT VOL. Progress00% L SL SW C YPAOComplete R SR VOL. L SL SW C R SR 7 Remove the YPAO microphone. YPAO finishes automatically when the YPAO microphone is removed. VOL. L SL SW C R SR NOTE i SETUP j Cursor C / D / E j ENTER SW C R SR The following display appears if measurement finishes without any problems. YPAO L SL You can use the following method to cancel measurement results if you want to redo the measuring. Press jCursor C to switch to the following display, the use jCursor D / E to select “Cancel” and press jENTER. After this operation, use the same procedure to carry out YPAO again. Display during measurement YPAO VOL. Disconnect MIC DISPLAY TOP MENU Press jENTER to apply the results of measurement. When a problem occurs, an error message or report appears either during or after measurement. Use the following page as a reference to solve the problem, and carry out YPAO again. The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you have finished measuring, store the microphone out of direct sunlight, and away from locations that may experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV equipment. En 22 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ When an error message appears RECEIVER SLEEP 2 3 Check the content of the message from the list of messages (☞p. 24) to resolve the problem, and carry out the measurement process again. A AV 2 3 AUDIO 1 [ A ] [ B ] DOCK YPAO VOL. E-9:CANCEL AM PRESET TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MUSIC When “E-5” to “E-9” is displayed: during measurement HDMI Error message (example) STEREO after measurement 1 2 3 Check that the environment is suitable for accurate measurement. Press jENTER to switch the display. SCENE TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 4 5 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE j Check the error code that appears in the display, and carry out YPAO again by performing the following steps. When “E-10” is displayed: When “E-1” or “E-2” is displayed: 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Press jENTER once, and then press jCursor E to select “Exit.” Press jENTER to finish YPAO, and set the unit to standby mode. Check that the speakers are properly connected. Turn on the unit, and then carry out YPAO again. Check the content of the message from the list of messages (☞p. 24) to resolve the problem. You can confirm the speaker that has the problem when that speaker’s indicator lights up. NOTE Check that “Retry” is selected, and then press jENTER to carry out YPAO again. STRAIGHT BD DVD ■ When a warning message appears Press jENTER once, and then press jCursor E to select “Exit.” Press jENTER to finish YPAO. Although you can apply the results of measurement when a warning message appears, doing so will not provide optimal sound. We recommend you resolve the problem and then carry out YPAO again. YPAO W-3:LEVEL Warning message (example) Switch the unit to standby mode. VOL. SL SR Speaker that has a problem. When multiple warning messages appear: Use jCursor D / E to display other warning messages. Turn on the unit again, and then carry out YPAO. When applying the results of measurement: Press jENTER to switch display, the use jCursor D / E to select “Set” and press jENTER. When cancelling YPAO: Press jENTER to switch display, the use jCursor D / E to select “Cancel” and press jENTER. j Cursor D / E j ENTER En 23 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ■ Message list E-5:NOISY NOTE If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have occurred and carry out the measurement process again. The noise is too loud, preventing accurate measurements from being taken. ■ When a warning message appears before measurement Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is not connected. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug PHONES! The headphones are connected. Remove the headphones. Memory Guard! The settings of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” in the Setup menu to “Off.” E-7:NO MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. While measuring, take care not to touch the YPAO microphone. E-8:NO SIGNAL The YPAO microphone could not distinguish a test tone. Check that the YPAO microphone has been installed correctly. ■ Error message E-1:FRONT SP The unit was not able to find the front channel. Check that the left and right front speakers are connected correctly. E-2:SUR. SP The unit was only able to find one of side of the surround channels. Check that the left and right front surround speakers are connected correctly. Measure again in quiet surroundings. Turn off any devices in the room that may be emitting noise, or place them further away from the YPAO microphone. When this message is displayed, selecting “Proceed” will allow you to continue measuring. However, we recommend resolving the problem and measuring again, as continuing measurement without doing so will not give accurate results. Check that each speaker has been connected and installed correctly. The YPAO microphone or the YPAO MIC jack may be broken. Inquire at the retailer where you purchased this unit, or the nearest Yamaha service center. E-9:CANCEL E-10:INTERNAL You have carried out an operation that has cancelled the measuring process. Carry out the measuring process again. Do not operate this unit by, for example, adjusting the volume. An internal error has occurred. Turn off and on this unit, and carry out the measuring process again. Contact a Yamaha service center if “E-10” appears again. ■ Warning message W-1:PHASE The speakers displayed are connected with the opposite polarity. Depending on the type of speakers you are using and the environment in which you have them installed, this message may occur even if the speakers are connected correctly. Depending on the type of speakers, “W-1” may display even if the speakers are connected correctly. W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The speakers displayed are separated from the listening position by more than 24m, and cannot be adjusted correctly. Install the speakers with 24m of the listening point. W-3:LEVEL The difference each channel is too loud or too low, and cannot be adjusted correctly. Check that all speakers are installed in the same surroundings. Check that the speaker polarity + (plus), and (minus) are correct. If these are connected correctly, you can use the speakers normally even this message appears. Check that the speaker polarity + (plus), and (minus) are correct. We recommend the same speakers or speakers with as similar specifications as possible. Adjust the volume of the subwoofer. If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results, but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process again. En 24 PLAYBACK CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Basic playback procedure RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK d TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC 1 2 Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. Turn on this unit and select the input source using dInput selector. The name of the selected input source is displayed for a few seconds. J1 TUNING Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output level in those frequency ranges. Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Adjustment increments 2.0 dB ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT 3 SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION ENTER RETURN Play the external component that you have selected as the source input, or select a radio station on the tuner. VOLUME r Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the external component for details on playback. MUTE s For details on how to tune in to FM/AM stations, refer to “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 30). DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones connected. 1 The display returns to the previous display soon after you release the key. If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.” TONE CONTROL REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH ENT 4 Press rVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume. YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM To mute the output. Press sMUTE to mute the audio output. Press sMUTE again to unmute. MUTE AM SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD RADIO STRAIGHT PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA PROGRAM l / h The current setting is displayed on the front panel display. d Input selector r VOLUME +/s MUTE TONE Treble VOL. 0.0dB L SL SW C R SR J 1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display as necessary (☞p. 49). En 25 PLAYBACK Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to turn the power on and change input sources and sound field programs with one key. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY Four scenes are available for different uses, such as d playing movies or music. The following input sources and sound field programs are provided as the initial factory settings. SCENE Input Sound field program BD/DVD HDMI1 STRAIGHT TV AV4 STRAIGHT CD AV3 STRAIGHT RADIO TUNER 5ch Enhancer ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO g STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU 1 2 Use dInput selector to select the input source you want to register. Use the gSound selection keys to select the sound field program you want to register. Press one key repeatedly to select the sound field program in the same category. For details on sound field program, refer to “Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders” on this page. VOLUME ENTER RETURN h Registering input sources/sound field program 3 Press the hSCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel display. SCENE1 VOL. SET Complete L SL SW C R SR Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed. When changing “SCENE,” you can also use switch between the external components that the remote control operates (☞p. 53). MUTE REC Enjoying sound field programs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel playback for almost any sound source using various sound field programs stored on the chip, and a range of sound decoders. TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE d Input selector g Sound selection keys g MOVIE g MUSIC g STEREO g SUR. DECODE g STRAIGHT h SCENE Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders Selects sound field program: This unit offers sound field settings (sound field programs) in many different categories suitable for movies, music and other uses. Choose a sound field program that sounds best with the source you are playing back, rather than relying on the name or explanation of the program. Selects stereo reproduction: • Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input source is applied again. • If the sampling frequency of an input source is higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs. MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly. MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly. Press gSTEREO repeatedly. Selects compressed music enhancer: Press gSTEREO repeatedly. Selects surround decoder: Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly. Switches Straight decoding mode (☞p. 27): Press gSTRAIGHT. Sound field program categories MOVIE VOL. Sci-Fi L SL SW C R SR Program • You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel display to check what speakers are currently outputting sound (☞p. 7). • You can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters) for each of the programs. En 26 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK ■ Enjoying unprocessed playback ■ Enjoying stereo playback (Straight decoding mode) Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback sound without sound field processing. You can playback as follows in straight decoding mode. 2-channel sources such as CD TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Stereo sound plays through the front left and right speakers. Select “2ch Stereo” from the surround field programs when you want to playback 2-channel stereo sound (from the front speakers only), regardless of the playback source. Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the playback of CD and BD/DVD sources. 2-channel sources such as CD Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/ g DVD Plays back audio from a playback source without applying sound field effects, using an appropriate decoder to split the signal into multiple channels. 1 Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers. Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD Playback channels other than the front channels in the playback source are mixed with the front channels and played back through the front speakers. Press gSTRAIGHT to activate the straight decoding mode. 1 Press gSTEREO repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo.” without surround sound speakers This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to enjoy sound field surround effects, even without any surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You can even enjoy surround sound presence with just a minimal configuration of the front speakers only. This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode automatically when surround speakers are unavailable. J1 ■ Enjoying sound field programs with headphones Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT CINEMA mode). J2 MUTE STEREO VOL. REC STRAIGHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV 2 L SL SW C Press gSTRAIGHT again to exit straight decoding mode. TV CH MUTE MOVIE Sci-Fi g Sound selection keys g STRAIGHT g STEREO VOL. L SL SW C R SR Previously selected program J 1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available in the following conditions: • When headphones are connected to this unit. • When a “2ch Stereo” sound field program is selected. • When straight decoding mode is selected. VOL. SW 2ch Stereo R SR INPUT TV VOL ■ Enjoying sound field programs 2 R L To deactivate stereo playback, press any of the gSound selection keys to select a sound field program other than “2ch Stereo.” MUSIC Hall in Vienna VOL. L SL SW C R SR J 2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions: • When a “2ch Stereo” sound field program is selected. • When straight decoding mode is selected. En 27 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs Sound field programs Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects and dialog from a wide variety of scenes. in the table indicates the sound field program for CINEMA DSP. ■ Category: MOVIE Sound field programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive sounds. This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium. Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. ■ Category: MUSIC This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs. Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. En 28 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs ■ Category: STEREO Suitable for listening to stereo sources. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. When multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. 5ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. ■ Category: ENHNCR (Compressed music enhancer) Suitable for listening to compressed audio, such as MP3. Straight Enhancer Use this program to restore the original depth and dynamics of 2-channel or multi-channel to compression audio. 5ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 5-channel stereo. ■ Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode) Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sound sources in up to 5-channels using a surround decoder. q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of sound sources. q PLII Movie Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for movies. q PLII Music Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for music. q PLII Game Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for games. Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music. En 29 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 2 When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the best reception. 3 A AV 2 3 AUDIO 1 V UX V-A [ A ] [ B ] d e AM PRESET TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT (Asia and General models only) The factory pre-set FM/AM tuner frequency steps are 9 kHz for AM and 50 kHz for FM. Carry out the following settings and select the frequency steps suitable for your listening environment. SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU 1 2 1 4 5 8 0 Set this unit to the standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately 3 seconds, the top menu items are displayed. J1 MUTE REC 9 Press PROGRAM h twice to display “TU.” DOCK TUNER FM 3 Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning) A STRAIGHT 10 TV TU-AM9/FM50 4 5 Press STRAIGHT a few times to select frequency steps. 1 2 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press eFM or eAM to select a band to receive. VOL. Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. The power turns on, with the settings you made configured. FM87.50MHz L SL SW C R SR Continues to the next page The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. Normal tuning You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching or specifying its frequency. Preset tuning (☞p. 31) INPUT YPAO MIC TV VOL TV CH MUTE INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in. STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA d TUNER e FM e AM PROGRAM l / h REMOTEID-ID1 J 1 : For detailed information on the advanced setup menu see “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 56). En 30 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 3 HDMI 2 3 A AV 2 3 AUDIO 1 V UX V-A [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER AM PRESET TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT Use eTUNING H / I to set a frequency to receive. eTUNING H Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for longer than a second to search automatically for a station d on a higher frequency than the current one. J1 e eTUNING I Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for longer than a second to search automatically for a station on a lower frequency than the current one. J1 SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION q VOLUME ENTER Lights up when receiving a broadcast from a station Lights up when receiving a stereo broadcast POP-UP MENU Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 Use jCursor B / C to select “FM Mode.” OPTION L SL SW C VOL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ENT TV INPUT l In normal tuning mode, use the lNumeric keys on the remote control to enter a frequency. Leave the decimal point out when entering a number. J2 For example, enter as follows to select a station on 98.50MHz. Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations as preset stations. There are two methods of presetting stations, “Auto Preset” and “Manual Preset.” Use one of these methods to register stations. ■ Presetting FM stations automatically (Auto Preset) The tuner detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 automatically. AM stations cannot be automatically registered. Use manual station preset (☞p. 32). FMMode R SR ■ Entering a frequency number TV VOL Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. MUTE REC 10 1 2 3 STEREO TUNED FM98.50MHz TOP MENU When you are receiving an FM broadcast and cannot obtain a stable stereo broadcast, you can force this unit to receive in a monaural mode. VOL. j RETURN ■ When signal reception is poor 4 Press jENTER and use the jCursor D / E to select “Mono.” 9850 VOL. FMMode:Mono TV CH 1 2 3 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 Use jCursor B / C to select “Auto Preset.” MUTE 9 8 5 0 5 When setting is completed, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. To return this unit to its original settings, use the same procedure to return the settings to “Stereo.” d TUNER e TUNING H / I j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN l Numeric keys q OPTION OPTION VOL. Auto Preset L SL SW C R SR Continues to the next page J 1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has started. J 2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the frequency entered is correct. J 3 : See the section on “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” for details on the Option menu (☞p. 39). En 31 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 4 HDMI 2 3 A AV 2 3 AUDIO 1 [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING AM e MEMORY Press jENTER, then press ePRESET F / G or jCursor B / C to choose the preset number from which to start the Auto Preset function. Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after you select a preset number. If you do not select a preset number, Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after “READY” is displayed. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MUSIC STEREO Selecting a preset number STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP Status RADIO OPTION RETURN READY VOLUME ENTER Frequency j L SL SW C R SR DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE ■ Designating a preset number for registration (Manual Preset) Select stations by hand and register them as presets individually. 1 2 Tune in to the station you wish to register, referring to “Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)” (☞p. 30). Preset number Press eMEMORY for 2 seconds or longer. The station will be registered automatically to the lowest open preset number (or the next number after the one registered most recently). MEMORY To cancel registration, press jRETURN. 4 5 8 9 0 The newly registered frequency VOL. Blinks L SL SW C R SR Empty, or the frequency registered most previously. Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset to register the station to, and then press eMEMORY to register. To cancel registration, press jRETURN or do not operate the remote control for about 30 seconds. VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR During Auto Preset 10 TV INPUT TV VOL Preset number 01:Empty REC 1 Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset” on the front panel display. After a small wait, the preset number that the station has been registered to will appear. 9850 Use one of the following methods to register the station you are currently receiving. ■ Registering to a preset number to which no station is registered VOL. 01:FM87.50MHz ■ Registering stations manually Search Preset for stations SEARCH MEMORY Registered frequencies TV CH MUTE e MEMORY e PRESET F / G j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN When Auto Preset is complete FINISH Auto Preset VOL. L SL SW C R SR The Option menu closes automatically when presetting is complete. J1 J 1 : The preset with the lowest preset number will be selected automatically immediately after presetting. En 32 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Recalling a preset station RECEIVER SLEEP 2 3 A AV 2 3 AUDIO [ B ] DOCK To select a registered station, press ePRESET F / G to select the preset number of the d station. J2 PRESET TUNING e 1 V UX V-A 4 You can call preset stations registered by automatic station preset or manual station preset. J1 HDMI [ A ] TUNER Use jCursor B / C to select the preset number you want to clear, and press jENTER to clear it. Repeat this operation to clear the registration of multiple numbers. AM MEMORY Clearing preset stations 5 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MUSIC STEREO Press qOPTION to finish this operation. STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q j DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 Use jCursor B / C to display “Clear Preset” and press jENTER. The number of the preset to be cleared 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH ENT l CLEAR VOL. 01:FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR MUTE Blinks d TUNER e PRESET F / G j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN l Numeric keys q OPTION Registered frequencies Press jRETURN to cancel the operation. J 1 : Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be skipped. “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed when there are no stations are registered. J 2 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the lNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you wish listen to. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.” appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered the correct number. J 3 : See the section on “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” for details on the Option menu (☞p. 39). En 33 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Combining the video signals and RECEIVER SLEEP radio audio signals HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC Select the video signal to be output from the video output jack on this unit when TUNER is selected as the input source. For example, when watching the sports relay on the TV, only audio can be switched to the radio d audio. 1 2 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION RETURN OPTION j POP-UP MENU Video signals input from one of the HDMI1 to 4 are output from the HDMI output jack on this unit. AV1-2 Video signals input from either one of the AV1 and AV2 are output from the component output jack on this unit. AV3-5, V-AUX Video signals input from one of the AV3 to AV5 and VIDEO AUX are output from the composite output jack on this unit. Off Video signals are not output when TUNER is selected as the input source. 5 Press qOPTION to finish this operation. MUTE 3 REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 VOL. Volume Trim DISPLAY TOP MENU Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1 HDMI1-4 q VOLUME ENTER Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Selectable video source: Use jCursor B / C to display “Video Out” and press jENTER. OPTION VOL. Video Out ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 4 d TUNER j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER q OPTION Use jCursor D / E to select the video source you want to watch, and press jENTER. TUNER VOL. Video;;;;HDMI1 L SL SW C R SR J 1 : See the section on “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” for details on the Option menu (☞p. 39). En 34 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound field programs (☞p. 29) to give compressed audio formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE d • iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th generation), iPod (4th, and 5th generation, and Classic), iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th generation) and iPod mini are supported (As of October 2010). • When connecting an iPhone, please use a YDS-12. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses on the YDS-12. STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock Switch the power on and place your iPod/iPhone in the dock. The unit is now ready for playback. VOL. VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC j Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone. k iPodconnected 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 To prevent accidents, place this unit in standby mode before connecting an iPod universal dock. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE ARC HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO d DOCK j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER ks ke kp kw kf kb ka PR PR PB PB Y MONITOR OUT SW C R SR Controlling an iPod/iPhone CAUTION 1 L SL After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press dDOCK to switch to DOCK input and you can operate your iPod/iPhone. You can use the remote control of this unit to carry out basic operations (playback, stop, skip etc) on your iPod/ iPhone. You can check song information on the iPod/ iPhone screen. dDOCK Switches to the DOCK (iPod) input. jCursor B / C J1 Move the cursor up and down to different fields. jCursor D / E J1 Returns to the previous menu or enter the menu you have selected. jENTER J1 Enters the selected menu. kw Searches backwards while held down. kf Searches forwards while held down. kb Skips to the beginning of the currently playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips one song backwards with each press. ka Skips to the beginning of the next song. ks Stops playback. ke Switches between playback and pause. kp Switches between playback and pause. Y COMPON VIDEO OPTICA AV Yamaha iPod universal dock J 1 : These keys may not work for some types of iPod. In this case, carry out these operations directly with your iPod. En 35 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER ■ To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING d TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION RETURN q VOLUME ENTER If you connect an iPod/iPhone to the iPod universal dock the iPod/iPhone will always charge when this unit is turned on. This unit can charge an iPod/iPhone even when in standby mode (iPod Standby Charge function). Check the iPod CHARGE indicator ( iPod CHARGE ) on the front panel display of this unit to check whether this unit is charging an iPod/iPhone while in standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the iPod charge indicator lights. The indicator goes out when charging is finished. j If necessary, you can also deactivate the iPod Standby Charge function. DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH 1 2 3 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. Use jCursor B / C to display “Standby Charge” and press jENTER. MUTE DOCK VOL. Charge;;;;;;On d DOCK j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER q OPTION 4 5 L SL SW C R SR Use jCursor D / E to switch the setting to “Off.” When setting is completed, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. To re-activate the Standby Charge function carry out this procedure again and change the “Standby Charge” setting back to “On.” En 36 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible portable music players. J1 HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING NOTE d TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY e ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component. Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver Pairing Bluetooth™ components SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the q DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be j complete when this unit is turned on. DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the device which has not been used for the longest period of time will be deleted. MUTE REC ARC HDMI OUT 1 Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth component for the first time, or when settings have been deleted. Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth component as necessary when carrying out pairing. 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 10 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB 8 ENT TV Y MONITOR OUT INPUT TV VOL Y COMPON VIDEO TV CH MUTE OPTICA AV d DOCK e MEMORY j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver CAUTION To prevent accidents, place this unit in standby mode before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 1 2 3 4 DOCK Press qOPTION to display the Option menu and use jCursor B / C to select “Pairing.” OPTION Pairing VOL. Searching... L SL SW C R SR • To cancel pairing, press jRETURN. • You can also press and hold eMEMORY on the front panel to begin pairing. 5 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with and set it to pairing mode. Press jENTER to start pairing. Make sure the Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. When the device is recognized it will appear in the Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10 YAMAHA.” 6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth component list, and enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth component. When pairing occurs correctly VOL. L SL SW C R SR DOCK VOL. Completed L SL SW C R SR J 1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. En 37 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Using Bluetooth™ components RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET When pairing is complete, carry out the following procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless d connection is complete, you playback from Bluetooth components. Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless connection is established automatically or by operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is not necessary to carry out the following procedure. TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 j 1 2 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. 3 Use jCursor B / C to select “Connect” and press jENTER. J1 When wireless connection is complete VOL. BTconnected L SL SW C R SR “Not found” is displayed when there is an error connecting. Check that the following conditions have been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless connection again. • Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired. • The Bluetooth component is switched on. • The Bluetooth component is within 32 feet (10 meters) of the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 4 Operate the Bluetooth component for playback. To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.” ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE d DOCK j Cursor B / C j ENTER q OPTION J 1 : “Disconnect” is displayed while a Bluetooth component has been connected. En 38 SETUP CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 This receiver has a unique option menu specific for each type of input source, such as volume trim for compatible input sources, audio/video data display for signals from external devices, and other frequently used menu items. AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK d Option menu display and setup 3 TUNER AM PRESET TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 Use the dInput selector on the remote control to select the Option menu you wish to display. 2 Press qOPTION. STEREO MUSIC SCENE TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q Option menu POP-UP MENU OPTION MUTE VOL. VolumeTrim REC 1 4 5 8 0 L SL SW C To close the Option menu, press qOPTION. For a few seconds after closing the Option menu, the remote control keys may not function. If this occurs, reselect the input source. Select the desired menu item (or enable a function) using jCursor B / C / D / E and jENTER. Parameters of the selected item are displayed. The parameters you can set differ depending on the menu items. DISPLAY A TOP MENU 9 4 The Option menu appears for the desired input source. j 5 The displayed Option menu items differ depending on the input source. For details, read the following Option menu items section. STRAIGHT BD DVD Select the desired control/setup item using jCursor B / C and press jENTER. R SR • You can also use jRETURN to return to the previous screen or close the Option menu. • Certain selected menu items may automatically close the Option menu when their functions are enabled. 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Option menu items The following items are provided for each input source. “✓” indicates the available menu for each input source. d Input selector j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION Volume Trim Audio In Signal Info HDMI1-4 ✓ ✓ ✓ AV1-2 ✓ ✓ ✓ AV3-4 ✓ AV5 ✓ AUDIO1-2 ✓ V-AUX ✓ TUNER ✓ iPod (DOCK) ✓ Bluetooth (DOCK) ✓ FM Mode Auto Preset Clear Preset Video Out ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Standby Charge Connect/Disconnect Pairing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ En 39 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) ■ Adjusting volume between input sources Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input jacks. Volume Trim Input source: Settings method Optical digital audio input Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component audio cable to the optical jack for the selected input. Coaxial digital audio input Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component audio cable to the coaxial jack for the selected input. Analog audio input Select one of AV5, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2. Connect the external component audio cable to the audio jack for the selected input. All Reduces any change in volume when switching between input sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You can adjust this parameter for each input source. Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB Default setting 0.0 dB Adjustment increments 0.5 dB steps ■ Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source video and audio Audio In Input source: Audio inputs HDMI1-4, AV1-2 Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/ digital audio inputs in situations such as: – an external device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot transmit audio through HDMI – an external device with component video output and analog audio output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the system Inputs that change the audio source HDMI1 ■ Displaying information on audio/video signals Signal Info Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1 Displays information on digital audio and video signals on the front panel display. You can display the signal information by pressing jENTER on the menu item and using jCursor B / C. Menu item VOL. Audio;;;;;;AV1 • For details of settings, refer to “Receiving audio from other input sources” (☞p. 15) and “Component connections to analog audio output devices” (☞p. 16). • To return audio inputs to their previous settings, display this item again, and select the original input jack. L SL SW C R SR Assignable audio input jacks To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-4 or AV1-2) as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this menu. FORMAT Audio information FORMAT Format of audio signals. CHAN The number of input signal channels (front/surround/ LFE). For example, if input signal channels are 3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/0.1” is displayed. If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above is input, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed. SAMPL The sampling frequency of analog-to-digital conversion. B RATE The bit rate of input signal per second. Video information V IN Format and resolution of video input signal. V OUT Format and resolution of video output signal. V.MSG (appears only when an error has occurred) Error messages about HDMI signals and components. Error message HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Device Over The number of connected HDMI components is over the limit. • “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are being received, and “---” is displayed if this unit cannot recognize the incoming signal. • The bit rate may vary during playback. VOL. DolbyD L SL SW C R SR Information J 1 : AV5 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel” function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TVAudio). En 40 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) ■ Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural) FM Mode Input source: ■ Bluetooth™ wireless connections Connect TUNER Sets this unit to automatically match FM broadcast frequencies in stereo, or to convert the frequency to monaural (☞p. 31). Disconnect Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK) stations Enables/disables the Bluetooth wireless connection (☞p. 38). Select “Connect” to establish the wireless connection. Select “Disconnect” to disable the wireless connection. Auto Preset ■ Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio ■ Automatically presetting FM radio Input source: TUNER Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency and registers them as preset stations (☞p. 31). ■ Clearing preset FM stations receiver and your Bluetooth component Pairing Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK) Pairs your Bluetooth wireless device and this receiver (☞p. 37). Clear Preset Input source: TUNER Clears the preset stations (☞p. 33). ■ Combining the video signals and radio audio signals Video Out Input source: TUNER Select the type of video signals to be output from the video output jack on this unit when TUNER is selected as the input source (☞p. 34). ■ Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby mode Standby Charge Input source: iPod (DOCK) Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock while the receiver is in standby mode (☞p. 36). En 41 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP You can configure various function settings of this unit using the Setup menu. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 Setup menu display and settings AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK 1 TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING Press iSETUP on the remote control. HDMI SETUP ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO L SL SW C BD DVD TV CD RADIO i OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU Use the jCursor B / C to select the desired menu and press jENTER. Setup menu categories DISPLAY TOP MENU j 2 MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Speaker Setup Manages settings for speakers. Sound Setup Manages settings for audio output. Func. Setup Manages settings to make receiver operation easier, such as input source labeling and auto-standby functions. TV TV VOL HDMI Setup Manages settings for HDMI, such as HDMI Control functions. DSP Parameter Sets parameters for sound field programs. Memory Guard Protects settings against accidental alteration. TV CH MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN SOUND Lipsync 4 5 6 VOL. L SL SW C SW C Setup menu Speaker Setup Config Subwoofer Front Center Sur. LR Crossover SWFR Phase Extra Bass Level Distance Equalizer Test Tone Sound Setup Lipsync Adaptive DRC D.Range Max Volume Init.Volume HDMI Setup Control TVAudio ARC Audio (speakers) (unit and speakers) (speakers and frequency bands) R SR When multiple items appear, use jCursor B / C to select the desired item. Press jCursor D / E to change the setting. You can change other items by repeating step 4 and 5. You can also use jRETURN to return to the previous screen. ENT INPUT L SL Setup menu items R SR SCENE SETUP VOL. Audio;;;;;;Amp VOL. SpeakerSetup STRAIGHT 3 Use jCursor B / C to navigate the submenus to find the desired setting and press jENTER. R SR Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. For a few seconds after closing the Setup menu, the remote control keys may not function. If this occurs, reselect the input source. HDMI Auto Auto Manual Func. Setup Input Rename AutoPowerDown Dimmer DSP Parameter Memory Guard Ex: Sound Setup menu En 42 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Manual speaker setup Manages settings for speakers Config SETUP Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on manually set parameters. VOL. SpeakerSetup L SL SW C In the Config submenu, you can select the speaker size characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers. Manually manages speaker configuration, such as speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass audio processing. Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker. Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on distance to the listening point. Equalizer Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output characteristics. Test Tone Small (Default) Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components. J3 Large Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. R SR Speaker Setup submenu Config Front Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front speakers. J2 Generates test tones. Center Selects the size of the center speakers. Woofer diameter • 16 cm or larger → Large • 16 cm or smaller → Small When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components of the speakers that you configured are produced from the subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer). Subwoofer Confirms the subwoofer. Yes (Default) None J 1 : Enabling the “Extra Bass” setting allows both the subwoofer and the front speakers to produce bass audio. J 2 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will automatically change to “Large.” Select this when you have a subwoofer connected. During playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio from other channels. J1 None Select this when there is no center speaker. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected. Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected. Sur. LR Selects the size of the surround speakers. None Select this when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio signals. Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small. Large Select this when the surround speakers are large. Select this when you do not have a subwoofer connected. The front speakers will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass frequency audio from other channels. J 3 : Enabling the “Crossover” setting allows you to set the frequency components of audio signals transmitted from the front speakers to the subwoofer. En 43 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Crossover Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component output from speakers set to “Small.” Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the subwoofer or the front speakers. J1 ■ Controlling the volume of each speaker Level Distance Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. Use jCursor B / C to select the desired speaker and adjust the volume with jCursor D / E. 40Hz 110Hz 60Hz 120Hz FL Front speaker L 80Hz (Default) 160Hz FR Front speaker R 90Hz 200Hz C Center speaker SL Surround speaker L SR Surround speaker R SWFR Subwoofer 100Hz SWFR Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or unclear. NRM (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase. REV Reverses the subwoofer phase. Extra Bass Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer and the front speakers. Off (Default) On Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. ■ Manually setting speaker distance Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. Selecting adjustment units Use jCursor B / C to display “Unit,” and then use jCursor D / E to choose the units of length (meters or feet). Setting distances for each speaker Use jCursor B / C to display the speaker you want to configure, and then use jCursor D / E to set the distance from the speaker to your listening position. Unit Selects the distance unit (meters or feet). Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Front L Front speaker L Default setting 0 dB (FL / FR / SWFR) -1.0 dB (C / SL / SR) Front R Front speaker R Center Center speaker 0.5 dB Sur. L Surround speaker L Sur. R Surround speaker R SWFR Subwoofer Adjustable range 0.30 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) Default setting 3.00 m (10.0 ft) (Front L/Front R/SWFR) 2.60 m (8.5 ft) (Center) 2.40 m (8.0 ft) (Sur. L/Sur. R) Adjustment increments 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Adjustment increments The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. When the “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” the “Extra Bass” setting is disabled. J 1 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less). En 44 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Adjusting sound quality with the equalizer Equalizer Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric or graphic equalizer. ■ Generating test tones 3 Raising volume: Press jCursor E. Lowering volume: Press jCursor D. EQ Select Select an equalizer type. PEQ GEQ Off Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality. By pressing jENTER, you can adjust the characteristics of the graphic equalizer. Does not activate the equalizer. ■ Adjusting the graphic equalizer When “EQ Select” is displayed, use jCursor D / E to select “GEQ” and press jENTER. Check that “Channel” appears and use jCursor D / E to select the speaker for which you want to adjust the equalizer. GEQ VOL. 63Hz Uses the parametric equalizer to adjust sound quality. Selecting this setting applies the tone settings obtained using YPAO (☞p. 21). J1 GEQ (Default) 1 2 Press jCursor C repeatedly to select the frequency you want to adjust, then use jCursor D / E to adjust the volume. Frequency band L SL SW C Test Tone Turns the test tone generator on or off. Off (Default) Does not generate test tones. On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test tones are produced constantly. R SR Setting the volume level for the selected frequency Frequency range 63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/ 16 kHz Adjustable range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Default setting 0 dB Adjustment increments 0.5 dB You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances. For example, you can adjust the volume balance settings for each speaker, or whenever you adjust the settings on the internal graphic equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you have finished making adjustments. You can use jCursor B / C to select another frequency or return to step 2. Repeat steps 2-3 to adjust the tone to your liking. VOL. Channel;FRNT L L SL SW C R SR 4 When you have finished making adjustments, press iSETUP to close the Setup menu. The speaker you are adjusting J 1 : Using YPAO to carry out acoustic measurement selects “PEQ” automatically. “PEQ” does not appear if the measurement process has not been carried out at least once. En 45 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) SoundSetup Lipsync Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync function). VOL. L SL SW C R SR HDMI Auto When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts output timing if the TV supports an automatic lipsync function. Sound Setup submenu Off Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Adaptive DRC Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low volumes more audible. D.Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for digital audio playback. Max Volume Sets the maximum volume for this receiver. Init.Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. On (Default) Select this when the connected TV does not support the automatic lipsync function or you do not wish to use the automatic lipsync function. Set the correction time in “Manual.” Select this when the TV supports the automatic lipsync function. Fine-adjust the correction time in “Auto.” Auto Fine-adjust the audio output timing by entering the correction time provided when “HDMI Auto” is set to “On.” Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms Adjustment increments 1 ms ■ Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low volumes more audible Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level (from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “On.” J1 Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically. On Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. When the auto function is enabled, it adjusts the dynamic range as follows. On Off Input Level Volume: low Output Level SETUP ■ Synchronizing audio/video output Output Level Setting the audio output function of this unit On Off Input Level Volume: high Manual Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when the TV does not support the automatic lipsync function or “HDMI Auto” is set to “Off.” Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms Adjustment increments 1 ms Default setting 0 ms J 1 : The Adaptive DRC setting is also effective when you use headphones. En 46 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS dynamic range D.Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream (Dolby Digital and DTS) playback. Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. Std Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for regular home use. Max (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. ■ Setting the maximum volume ■ Setting the startup volume Setting HDMI functions Init.Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the receiver last entered standby mode. J1 Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Default setting Off Adjustment increments 0.5 dB SETUP VOL. HDMISetup L SL SW C R SR HDMI Setup submenu Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off. TVAudio J2 Chooses automatically selected audio input in conjunction with TV operation when the HDMI Control is turned on. ARC J2 Transmits audio/video output to the TV and audio input from the TV through a single HDMI cable. Audio J2 Selects the audio output device connected to this unit via HDMI jacks. Max Volume Sets a maximum volume level so that the audio is not played too loudly. The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest volume. Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB / +16.5 dB (Maximum volume) Default setting +16.5 dB Adjustment increments 5.0 dB J 1 : When you set the “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Init.Volume,” the “Max Volume” setting has priority. J 2 : When “Control” is set to On, “TVAudio” and “ARC” appear. When “Control” is set to Off, “Audio” appears. En 47 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control) Control Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those devices. Please refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 59) for instructions. Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.” On Sets HDMI Control to “On.” If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate. ■ Selecting an input source to assign audio input for the TV TVAudio Select the input source that matches operations carried out on the TV while the HDMI Control function is on. When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to the input source selected here. J1 AV1 to AV5 Assigns any of the AV1-5 input source for the audio input from the TV. AUDIO1/AUDIO2 Assigns AUDIO1 or AUDIO2 input source for the audio input from the TV. Default setting AV4 • “TVAudio” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “On.” • Please refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 58) for setting instructions. • For details on inputting the audio signal from the TV, refer to “Listening to TV audio” (☞p. 14). ■ Listening to TV audio via single HDMI ■ Changing the output destination of HDMI input audio signals Audio Choose whether to playback audio from an external component such as a BD/DVD player connected via HDMI through this unit or through a TV. Amp (Default) Outputs audio through this unit only. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with this unit. TV Outputs audio through a TV only. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with the TV. J2 Amp+TV Outputs audio from the TV and this unit. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with TV. cable (Audio Return Channel) ARC You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function. When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this unit via an HDMI cable. The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source selected in “TVAudio.” J1 By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the unit. Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.” On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.” “Audio” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “Off.” When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display. TV AV4 VOL. L SL SW C R SR • “ARC” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “On.” • Please refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return Channel function” (☞p. 60) for setting instructions. J 1 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input source cannot be used. J 2 : When “TV” is selected, the speakers of this unit do not output sound. En 48 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Making the receiver easier to use RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 3 AV 1 2 SETUP AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK Func.Setup L SL SW C R SR Func. Setup submenu AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC Input Rename Changes the input source names. AutoPowerDown Goes into standby mode. Dimmer Sets the Brightness of the front panel display. STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE TV CD SETUP Blu-ray Satellite DVD VCR SetTopBox Tape Game MD TV PC DVR iPod CD HD DVD CD-R (blank) HDMI1 RADIO i VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU ■ Changing input source names Input Rename MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 j ENT Changes the input source names to be shown on the front panel display. You can change an input source name by choosing from a list of templates, or make one of your own. ■ Selecting a template HDMI1 Blu-ray 4 TV VOL TV CH MUTE 1 Select “Input Rename” from the Setup menu and press jENTER. HDMI1 4 HDMI1 i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN L SL R SR Renaming the input source 2 Select the input source that you want to rename using jCursor B / C. Use jCursor B / C to select the characters you wish to change, and use jCursor D / E to enter those characters. • • • • VOL. L SL SW C R SR Confirm the new display name by pressing jRETURN. Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. ■ Entering an original name 1 2 R SR The following characters are available for input source. VOL. SW C SW C L SL Cursor 5 Select “Input Rename” from the Setup menu and press jENTER. A to Z, a to z 0 to 9 Symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.) Space Repeat step 4 until you have entered the new input source name. HDMI1 To cancel a name change, select the original name and then press jRETURN to exit renaming. TV INPUT VOL. HDMI1 OPTION RETURN Press jENTER. TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE BD DVD 3 VOL. TUNER FM Use jCursor D / E to select a new name from the following templates. VOL. YAMAHABD 6 SW C L SL R SR Confirm the new display name by pressing jENTER. Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. To cancel a name change, press jRETURN. Select the input source that you want to rename using jCursor B / C. En 49 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Goes enter standby mode automatically when you leave it without operating Setting sound field program parameters You can set the parameters for the sound field programs (☞p. 51). AutoPowerDown If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode (Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is “Off.” When you wish to activate this function, set the amount of time to pass before this unit will enter standby. Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled. 4hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for four hours. 8hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for eight hours. 12hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for twelve hours. This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the timer. SETUP VOL. DSPParameter L SL SW C R SR Prohibiting setting changes SETUP Memory Guard VOL. L SL SW C R SR Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings on Setup menu. Off (Default) Settings are not protected. On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until it is returned to “Off.” While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the settings. ■ Setting the brightness of the front panel display Dimmer Sets the brightness of the front panel display. Lowering the setting dims the display. Adjustable range -4 to 0 Default setting 0 En 50 SETUP Setting sound field program parameters CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP Although the sound field programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange the effect by setting the sound field elements (parameters). To adjust the sound effects suitable for acoustical conditions of audio/video sources or rooms, perform the following operations. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK Setting sound field parameters 4 TUNER FM PRESET INFO 1 2 AM TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO SETUP VOLUME ENTER DSPPRM Use jCursor B / C to select “DSP Parameter” and press jENTER. VOL. DSPParameter j Sound field parameter L SL SW C R SR DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 3 Use jCursor D / E to choose the sound field program you want to edit. DSPPRM Sci-Fi ENT TV Sound field program to be edited INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER VOL. L SL SW C R SR DSP Level Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the sound effect. VOL. DSPLevel;;0dB i OPTION RETURN Press iSETUP to display the Setup menu. ■ CINEMA DSP parameters Press jCursor B / C to select the parameter that you want to change, and press jCursor D / E to change the parameter. L SL SW C -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Default setting 0 dB Choices When there are multiple parameters in the sound field program you are configuring, repeat step 4 as necessary to change other parameters. 5 Adjustable range R SR Once you have completed editing, press iSETUP to close the Setup menu. Adjust “DSP Level” as follows: • The effect sound is too soft. • There are no differences between effects of the sound field programs. → Increase the effect level. • The sound is dull. • The sound field effect is added too much. → Reduce the effect level. ■ To initialize the sound field parameters To set the parameters of the sound field program back to default, press jCursor C repeatedly during editing to select “Initialize” and press jCursor E. When “Press Again >” is displayed, press jCursor E again to initialize. DSPPRM Initialize VOL. L SL SW C R SR To cancel operations, press jCursor D when “Press Again” appears and return to the original display. En 51 SETUP Setting sound field program parameters ■ Parameters usable in certain sound field programs EFCT LVL 2ch Stereo only Adjusts the effect level of the compressed music enhancer mode. Direct Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog sound source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. Auto (Default) Off Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and “Treble” are set to 0dB. Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control circuit. 5ch Stereo only CT Level Adjusts the center channel volume. J1 Adjustable range Default setting Straight Enhancer/5ch Enhancer only High (Default) Standard effect. Low Sets when the high-frequency signals of the source are emphasized excessively. ■ Parameters usable in surround decoder q PLII Music only SL Level Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J1 Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value more positive. Adjustable range -3 to +3 Default setting 0 Panorama Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/ right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Off (Default) Disables the effect. On Enables the effect. 0 to 100% 100% Dimension CT Width When Neo:6 Music is selected C.Image Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0 Default setting 0.3 Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0 for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only. Adjustable range 0 to 100% Adjustable range 0 to 7 Default setting 100% Default setting 3 SR Level Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J1 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% J 1 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive. En 52 SETUP Controlling other components with the remote control CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP c You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code). The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING d Selecting input source connected to DVD player Keys connecting external components Default remote control code settings TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC DVD player ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION RETURN POP-UP MENU CD player j Selecting input source connected to CD player DISPLAY TOP MENU Playback/Stop q VOLUME ENTER i MUTE REC k 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 DVD player l TV VOL TV CH m Playback/Stop MUTE CD player c SOURCE A d Input selector i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN k External component cSOURCE A Switches an external component on and off. jCursor, jENTER, jRETURN Operates the menus of external components. kDISPLAY Switches an external component display. kExternal component operation keys Functions as a recording or playback key of an external component, or a menu display key. lNumeric keys Functions as numeric keys of an external component. ENT TV INPUT The remote control keys for controlling external components are available only when the external components have corresponding control keys. If you are unable to operate this unit after operating an external component, press iSETUP or qOPTION and then try operating the remote control again. mTV control keys J1 J 1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in mA (mTV control keys). To register a TV remote control code to dInput selector: You can use the jCursor, lNumeric keys, and mTV Input Category Manufacturer Remote control code HDMI1 Blu-ray player/ recorder Yamaha 2064 HDMI2 — — — HDMI3 — — — HDMI4 — — — AV1 — — — AV2 — — — AV3 CD player Yamaha 5095 AV4 — — — AV5 — — — mINPUT Switches video inputs of TV AUDIO1 — — — mMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily. AUDIO2 — — — mTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV V-AUX — — — mTV CH +/- Switches TV channels. A/B J2 — — — mA Turns on and off TV DOCK DOCK Yamaha 5089 TUNER Tuner Yamaha 5085 operation keys k DISPLAY l Numeric keys m TV control keys m INPUT m MUTE m TV VOL +/m TV CH +/mA q OPTION The following remote control codes are assigned to input sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of available remote control codes, please refer to “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM. To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to dInput selector: You can use the jCursor and lNumeric keys etc to control external components, and the mTV control keys to control TVs registered in mA. J 2 : Use A/B for external component operations only. Set these keys to remote control codes if you want to perform external component operations without linking to input source selection of this unit. For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes for devices such as TVs. control keys to control a TV you have registered. En 53 SETUP Controlling other components with the remote control CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER SLEEP MI 1 2 1 2 d 3 Registering remote control codes for external component operations A AV 3 AUDIO 5 The following section describes how to register remote control code using an example of the registration of the remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected to HDMI2 jack. 1 [ A ] [ B ] DOCK AM PRESET TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD 3 TV CD SETUP RADIO h OPTION VOLUME RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC • Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. • Remote control code of an external component cannot be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of external components. • If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it does not work then try the other codes. 4 Press dHDMI2 on the remote control to switch the input source to HDMI2. J1 Perform the following steps to register the selected input source here to the remote control code. To switch between BD player linked to scene selections, press hSCENE and at the same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. Enter a remote control code “2064” using lNumeric keys. J2 Then you can operate the external components by switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting HDMI2 in the registered scene. 2 6 0 4 Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice. 5 Same steps for operating other external components, press hSCENE and at the same time press the input source key selected in step 3 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times TRANSMIT SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 l 1 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH m MUTE Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CDROM to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of external components. “2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player. d HDMI2 h SCENE l Numeric keys m TV control keys mA n CODE SET 2 • If the registration fails, repeat the step 2. • In case of an external component with multiple remote control codes, the other remote control codes may be supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote control codes. Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. J 1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV control keys, press mA (mTV control keys) in step 3. J 2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4. En 54 SETUP Controlling other components with the remote control CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER SLEEP Resetting all remote control codes HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 Resetting all remote control codes for external components to the initial factory settings. AV AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING STEREO STRAIGHT 1 SCENE TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION 8 9 1 Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice. Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times ENHANCER SUR. DECODE BD DVD Enter “9981” using lNumeric keys. 9 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. TUNER FM 3 i Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. TRANSMIT SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER SLEEP RETURN blinks twice VOLUME ENTER HDMI If setup fails, repeat from step 1. DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU TRANSMIT MUTE REC SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT l 2 Press iSETUP on the remote control. TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE i SETUP l Numeric keys n CODE SET En 55 SETUP Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows. Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu 3 Use PROGRAM to select the item to be set from the following items. In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings. 1 2 Set this unit to the standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately 3 seconds, the top menu items are displayed. A STRAIGHT YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver. TU (Asia and General models only) Selects one of the following FM/AM frequency steps. INIT Initializes various settings for this unit. 4 5 Press STRAIGHT a few times to select the value you wish to change. Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. The settings become effective and the unit is powered on. If initialization is selected, it will be performed when the unit is powered on again. SILENT CINEMA PROGRAM l / h REMOTEID-ID1 En 56 SETUP Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using multiple Yamaha receivers AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK ■ To change the remote control ID Changing FM/AM frequency steps (Asia and General models only) Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 1. TU-AM9/FM50 TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU REMOTEID-ID1 TUNING The remote control of the unit can only receive signals from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote i control ID for its corresponding receiver. On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote control to operate 2 receivers. MUTE ID1 (Default) Receives the remote control signals set in ID1. ID2 Receives the remote control signals set in ID2. REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE l 1 2 3 Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. You can select one of the following FM/AM frequency steps: J1 AM10/FM100 You can adjust the AM frequency by steps of 10kHz and FM by steps of 100kHz. AM9/FM50 (Default) You can adjust the AM frequency by steps of 9kHz and FM by steps of 50kHz. Press iSETUP on the remote control. Enter the desired remote control ID code. To switch to ID1: Enter “5019” using lNumeric keys. Initializing various settings for this unit To switch to ID2: Enter “5020” using lNumeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice. ENT ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the remote control ID for both remote control and receiver. Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times TRANSMIT i SETUP l Numeric keys n CODE SET SOURCE INIT-CANCEL Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it back to default. Select the items to be initialized from the following. CODE SET DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound field programs. ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings. CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI • If setup fails, repeat from step 1. • Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is initialized (☞p. 55). J 1 : For details on setting FM/AM frequency steps, refer to “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 30). En 57 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to operate external components via HDMI. If you connect devices that support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Linkcompatible TVs, DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) J1, you can use the following operations with the remote control of any of those devices: – Power synchronization (on/standby) – Volume control, including Mute – Changing the volume of the audio output signal device (either the TV or this unit) TV 1 2 Connect the TV, DVD recorder supporting HDMI Control to this unit’s HDMI output jack. 3 4 Press iSETUP. J2 Control signal (such as volume control) Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external components. Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup” and press jENTER. 5 SW C L SL SW C R SR NOTE – Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On” – Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect this unit to the TV 6 Set the TV/DVD recorder’s HDMI Control function to On. Check the instruction manuals for those devices. 7 Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that is connected to this unit (ex. HDMI1). 9 10 Turn the TV off. Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually. If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control function are connected to this unit, turn them on. Receiver unit Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder has been selected. If a different input source has been selected, please change it manually. TV/DVD Recorder Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is being properly received by the TV. Operations 1-10 will not be required more than twice. 11 Press iSETUP when you have finished changing the setting. The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV, and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below. Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If it is still off, turn it on manually. R SR VOL. Control;;;;;On This unit L SL Make sure that “Control” is selected, and then use jCursor D / E to select “On.” HDMI Remote control of TV VOL. Control;;;;Off HDMI Turn the TV on. Turn on the TV and this unit. HDMI HDMI connection 8 Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV through the following operations by using the TV remote control. • Power On/Off • Volume Control • Switching between audio output devices If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both devices. If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and replugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the problem. J 1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same manufacturer whenever possible. J 2 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 42) for details on the Setup menu. En 58 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ■ Switching the input source on this To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry out the following procedure. When the HDMI Control (☞p. 58) is operating properly, the input source of this unit is automatically changed to match operations carried out on the TV. The default input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can enjoy TV sound through this unit right away. 1 2 unit automatically when listening to TV audio HDMI TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE Audio output (Optical) HDMI The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the TV. TV CD SETUP RADIO i OPTICAL DOCK O OPTION PR PR PB PB Y VOLUME ENTER j (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT TV Y COMPONENT VIDEO 5 AV 1 Input jack HDMI 4 Optical digital audio output AV1 or AV4 (default) MONITOR OUT Coaxial digital audio output AV2 or AV3 Analog stereo output AV5, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 5 AV OUT A AUDIO 1 6 AUDIO 2 Available input jacks MUTE 2 3 4 DOCK HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 6 7 0 10 8 PR PR PB PB ENT Y TV MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO 7 MONITOR OUT VIDEO INPUT TV CH MUTE OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER 3 OPTICAL AV OUT AUDIO OUT L SL SW C R SR VOL. TVAudio;;;;AV4 (BD/DVD) COMPONENT VIDEO TV VOL R SR Press jCursor C to select “TVAudio” and select the input jack connected in step 2 using jCursor D / E. HDMI ARC 9 SW C VOL. Control;;;;;On REC 5 L SL Make sure that “Control” is selected, and then use jCursor D / E to select “On.” HDMI TV output jack O OPTICAL POP-UP MENU HDMI 3 VIDEO DISPLAY TOP MENU HDMI 2 HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 VOL. Control;;;;Off Connect TV’s audio output to this unit. ARC SCENE RETURN Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI cable. Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup” and press jENTER. STEREO STRAIGHT BD DVD 4 L SL SW C R SR Press iSETUP when you have finished changing the settings. If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this unit will automatically switch to the input source chosen in step 6. Press iSETUP. J1 J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 42) for details on the Setup menu. En 59 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Single HDMI cable input to TV RECEIVER SLEEP audio with Audio Return Channel function HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable (Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to any input source. AUDIO 5 V-AUX [ A ] 1 2 [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 HDMI VOL. Control;;;;Off 4 L SL SW C R SR Make sure that “Control” is selected, and then use jCursor D / E to select “On.” STEREO STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup” and press jENTER. TV CD SETUP RADIO i VOLUME j 1 HDMI Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI cable. VOL. Control;;;;;On L SL SW C R SR OPTION ENTER RETURN TV 5 Press jCursor C to select “TVAudio” and select the input source that you want to assign to the HDMI audio signals from the TV using jCursor D / E. J2 TV audio output 6 Press jCursor C to select “ARC” and press jCursor E to select “On.” HDMI DISPLAY HDMI POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Video / Audio output The Audio Return Channel function will turn on. HDMI ENT TV INPUT HDMI ARC TV VOL TV CH DOCK MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO 2 PR PR PB PB Press iSETUP. J1 VOL. ARC;;;;;;;;;On 7 L SL SW C R SR Press iSETUP when you have finished changing the settings. If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this unit will automatically switch to the input source chosen in step 6. J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 42) for details on the Setup menu. J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input source cannot be used. En 60 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. General Problem The power will not turn on. Cause The protection circuitry operated three times consecutively. Remedy See page As a safety precaution, when the protection circuitry operates three times consecutively, the capability to turn on the power is disabled. Please contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. — The unit enters standby mode soon after the power is turned on. The power cable is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall outlet. — (When this unit is turned back on and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. 11 This unit cannot be turned off or does not work properly. The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — The batteries in the remote control may have lost their charge. Replace all batteries. 4 The unit enters standby mode. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker with an impedance of at least 6Ω. — After display of a countdown on the front panel, the unit goes into standby mode. If you do not use take any action, the Auto Power Down function operates. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. — In the Setup menu “AutoPowerDown” (“Func. Setup” → “AutoPowerDown”), increase the time until switching to standby mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down function. 50 Problem Cause See page Remedy “Internal Error” is displayed on the front panel display. An internal error has occurred. Please contact authorized Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. — Sound/images suddenly go off. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other, then turn the unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off the unit. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. — En 61 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Problem No sound. No picture. Cause Remedy See page Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 15 If a DVI-HDMI cable is used to connect the unit with an external component, then it is necessary to use an audio input jack for a different input to output audio. Display the HDMI Input Option menu for the connected cable, select “Audio In,” and select the jack to use for audio input. 40 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11 The HDMI components connected to the unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 40 The audio input into the device is set to playback through the TV. In the Setup menu, set the HDMI Audio Out (“HDMI Setup” → “Audio”) to other than “TV.” 48 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with dInput selector (on the remote control). 25 The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. — Signals that this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CDROM. Use an input source that has signals that can be reproduced on this unit. — A video jack (ex. Video input → HDMI output) type different to the input video is being used to try to display content on the TV. Use video jacks of the same type (ex. Video input → Video output) to connect to the TV. 13 An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV. Select an appropriate video input on the TV. — Problem No sound is output from a specific speaker. Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. Cause See page Remedy The speaker is malfunctioning. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator lights up, connect another speaker and check if sound is output. If sound is not output, the unit may be malfunctioning. The playback component or speakers are not connected properly. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11, 15 Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, try the following. 1) Change to a different input source. 2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not output from that speaker. Select another sound field program. 3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu, and set respective parameters to enable output from that speaker (“Speaker Setup” → “Config”). 7, 43 The volume of that speaker is set to the minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu. Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu and adjust the volume (“Speaker Setup” → “Level”). 44 (If hardly any sound comes from one channel) Speaker output balance is not set correctly. Balance the volume of each speaker from “Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker Setup” → “Level”). 44 Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the input source or sound field program. Try another sound field program. 26 When a monaural source sound field program is applied, for some surround decoders, sound from all channels is output from the center speaker. Try another sound field program. 26 En 7 62 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Problem No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. Cause Remedy See page This unit is in straight decoding mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press gSTRAIGHT (on the remote control) to exit straight decoding mode. 27 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound field programs. Try another sound field program. 26 A subwoofer is not connected, or it is disabled. Check that a subwoofer is connected correctly, and from the Setup menu “Subwoofer” (“Speaker Setup” → “Config” → “Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to “On.” 43 Turn the subwoofer power on. If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off sensitivity settings. — The subwoofer is turned off. The source does not contain LFE (☞p. 68) or low frequency signals. — The right combination of audio / video jacks to connect cannot be found. Combine input connected to the external component video output with another input audio jack. Select a desired input source (HDMI1-4 or AV1-2) as a video input and select a audio input source from “Audio In” in the Option menu. 40 The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Set the playback component properly referring to its instruction manual. — There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — Problem Noise/hum noise is heard. The volume cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. Cause See page Remedy Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — A DTS-CD is being played back. If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not resolved, the problem may result from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. — The component connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on. When the component connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the sound may be distorted, or the volume may decreased due to the nature of AV receivers. Turn on all components connected to this unit. — “Max Volume” is set to a low value. Set it to a higher value. 47 En 63 APPENDIX Troubleshooting HDMI™ Problem Tuner (FM/AM) Cause Remedy See page FM Problem The front panel display HDMI indicator is flashing. No picture or sound. (When using HDMI Control function) TV sound is not output from this unit when operating the remote control of the TV. An error with the HDMI connection has occurred. Try re-inserting the HDMI cable. — Confirm that HDMI video that is not supported by the unit is not being input (HDMI Input → Option menu → “Signal Info”). 40 The number of components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The connected HDMI component does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. — The TV audio output is not connected to this unit, or the setting to match operations carried out on TV is not set. Connect the TV audio output to this unit, and then select the connected input source in “TVAudio” (Setup menu → HDMI Setup → TVAudio). 48 (When using Audio Return Channel function) The Audio Return Channel function is not working. Make sure that your TV supports Audio Return Channel. Set the Audio Return Channel function to on (Setup menu → HDMI Setup → ARC). 48 FM stereo reception is noisy. Cause You are too far from the station transmitter, or the input from the antenna is weak. See page Remedy Check the antenna connections. 20 Switch to monaural mode. 31 Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. — There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. You are in an area far from a station, or input from the antenna is weak. Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi element antenna. — Use eTUNING H / I (on the remote control) to manually select the station. 31 “No Presets” is displayed. No preset stations are registered. Register stations you wish to listen to as preset stations before operation. 31 “Wrong Station” is displayed. An invalid FM/AM frequency has been input. Input a frequency that can be received. — En 64 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Remote control AM Cause The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak, or the antenna connections are loose. Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 20 Use the manual tuning method. 30 Automatic station preset does not work. Automatic station preset is not available for AM stations. Use manual station preset. 32 Continuous crackling and hissing noises are heard. The supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 20 The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing and properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna. 20 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — Buzzing and whining noises are heard. Remedy See page Problem Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. External components cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause See page Remedy Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 20 ft / 6 m, and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. — Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. 57 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “Remote control code search” on the CDROM. — Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “Remote control code search” on the CD-ROM. — If this unit does not work when you press — jCursor B / C / D / E (on the remote control), do the following. When the key does not work during DVD disc menu operation: press the dInput selector (on the remote control) again. When the key does not work during Option menu/Setup menu operation: press the key corresponding to the current menu operation again. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. En — 65 APPENDIX Troubleshooting iPod™/iPhone™ Display Loading... Connect error Bluetooth™ Cause Remedy See page The unit is in the process of recognizing the connection with your iPod/iPhone. — The unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod/iPhone. — There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod/iPhone to the unit. Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of the unit. 35 Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha iPod universal dock and then place it back in the dock. 35 Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the unit. — Display Searching... Cause The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of pairing. — The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of establishing a connection. — Completed The pairing is completed. — Canceled The pairing is canceled. — BT connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. — — Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not supported by the unit. iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. — Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Disconnected Your iPod/iPhone is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. — Not found The Bluetooth component is not found. Unable to play The unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod/iPhone. Check that songs are currently stored on your iPod/iPhone. — See page Remedy During pairing: – pairing must be performed on the Bluetooth component and this unit simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth component is in pairing mode. During connecting: – check if the Bluetooth component is turned on. – check if the Bluetooth component is within 32 feet (10 m) of the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. En — 66 APPENDIX Glossary Audio information Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround DTS Express Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack. En 67 APPENDIX Glossary LFE 0.1 channel Compressed music enhancer Deep Color This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. The Compressed music enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound system. Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced. Sound field program information CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field program, so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. Video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and audio/video monitors (such as digital TV), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.” “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. En 68 APPENDIX Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI signal compatibility NOTES Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: – – – – 480i/60 Hz 576i/50 Hz 480p/60 Hz 576p/50 Hz – 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz About trademarks Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, DTS-HD and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. iPod™, iPhone™ “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark of Apple Inc. En 69 APPENDIX Specifications ■ INPUT/OUTPUT Input jacks • HDMI input x 4 • AV input x 5 [Audio] Digital input (optical) x 2, digital input (coaxial) x 2, analog input x 1 [Video] Component video jacks x 2, video jacks x 3 • AUDIO input x 2 [Audio] Analog jack x 2 • VIDEO AUX input x 1 [Audio] Analog x 1, stereo mini jack x 1 [Video] Video jack x 1 Output jacks • TV output (monitor output) x 3 [Audio/Video] HDMI x 1 [Video] Component video jack x 1, video jack x 1 • AV output x 2 [Audio] Analog jack x 1 [Video] Video jack x 1 • AUDIO output x 1 [Audio] Analog jack x 1 ■ HDMI • HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - Dolby Digital - DTS - DSD 6ch - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby TrueHD - DTS-HD - PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible ■ Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express - Dolby Digital - DTS, DTS 96/24 • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema ■ AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) FRONT L/R........................................................................100 W/ch CENTER .................................................................................100 W SURROUND L/R...............................................................100 W/ch [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) FRONT L/R........................................................................100 W/ch CENTER .................................................................................100 W SURROUND L/R...............................................................100 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω .................................. 110/130/160/180 W [Other models] Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω ............................................ 105/130/150 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [China, Korea, General and Asia models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ............................................................ 135 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................... 120 W • IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .........................95 W+95 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω ........................................................................................ 0.23 dB • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance AV5, etc .....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD)..................................... 2.3 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω)...................................100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV5 to FRONT ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion AV5, etc. to FRONT [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)........ 0.06% or less [Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω) ............................. 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers) ................................................................................. 98 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front Speakers ........................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) ...........................60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control ...................................... MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB • Tone Control (Front Speakers) BASS Boost/Cut ............................................ ±10 dB/2 dB at 50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ..................................... ±10 dB/2 dB at 20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency.............................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ....................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ............................................................ 24 dB/oct. En 70 APPENDIX ■ VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models].........................NTSC [Other models]............................................................................PAL • Signal Level Composite......................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)....... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio ....................................................50 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion Off)............ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, ±3 dB ■ FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ...............................87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models].................................................87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono..................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo..................................................................74 dB/69 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3% • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .....................................250 W/320 VA [Other models] ........................................................................ 250 W • Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω • Standby Power Consumption [General models] ..........................................................1.0 W or less [Other models] ..............................................................0.5 W or less ■ AM SECTION • Dimensions (W x H x D) 435 x 151 x 315 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 12-3/8 in) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models]...................................530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models]..................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ........................................................531 to 1611 kHz • Weight 7.5 kg (16.5 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. ■ GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models].................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General models]......................... AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model].........................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ..................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia models] ............................................ AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz Index A F O Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 56 AM tuning.................................................................................... 30 Antenna connection ..................................................................... 20 Audio Return Channel function ................................................... 60 FM tuning.................................................................................... 30 Front panel .................................................................................... 5 Front panel display........................................................................ 7 Option menu ................................................................................ 39 HDMI Control function............................................................... 58 Rear panel...................................................................................... 6 Remote control, Controlling other components .......................... 53 Remote control, Part names and functions.................................... 8 H B R Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 37 I S C iPod™/iPhone™ playback .......................................................... 35 Cable plug .................................................................................... 12 Connections.................................................................................... 9 J SCENE function .......................................................................... 26 Setup menu .................................................................................. 42 Sound field program.................................................................... 26 Sound field program parameter setting ....................................... 51 Speaker connection........................................................................ 9 Speaker setting ............................................................................ 21 Supplied accessories...................................................................... 4 E External device connection .......................................................... 12 Jack.............................................................................................. 12 En 71 © 2011 Yamaha Corporation YD283A0/OMEN3
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72

Yamaha HTR-3064 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Receptores AV
Tipo
El manual del propietario

En otros idiomas